Sūrat al-Nabaʾ, Verses 1–5
The Verses
﴿عَمَّ يَتَسَآءَلُونَ ١﴾“About what are they asking one another?” (78:1)﴿عَنِ ٱلنَّبَإِ ٱلْعَظِيمِ ٢﴾“About the great news -” (78:2)﴿ٱلَّذِى هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ ٣﴾“That over which they are in disagreement.” (78:3)﴿كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٤﴾“No! They are going to know.” (78:4)﴿ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٥﴾“Then, no! They are going to know.” (78:5)Saheeh International.[1]
Simple Explanation
1. Summary
People speak in hushed questions about a truth that changes how human life is understood. The opening verses call it "the great news". At its heart, this is the Resurrection, the weighty promise that the dead will wake and stand for judgment. Yet many of our early teachers understood this news to be the "Qurʾān itself". In truth, the two meanings embrace one another. The Qurʾān is the great and sudden announcement, and the raising of the dead is the vast reality it asks us to finally see.
Its greatness does not depend on whether its hearers accept it. Yet they differ about it, denying it or remaining uncertain. Allah rebukes their denial and resistant questioning, warning that they will come to know the truth they now question. The warning is repeated with greater force. What is announced to them now will become a reality they encounter.[1]
2. Historical Context and Reports
The setting in Makkah
Al-Nabaʾ belongs to the Makkan revelation. The Prophet ﷺ was calling people to worship Allah and announcing resurrection, while the Qurʾān was being recited among them. These claims challenged their beliefs and prompted questioning. The Sūrah Introduction discusses the setting and the proposed revelation order more fully.[1]
The early accounts below describe that questioning. Their details differ, and no single account establishes a specific occasion for these verses.
Questioning after the Prophet ﷺ was sent
In a weak account, al-Ḥasan, a Successor who names no Companion eyewitness, relates that, when the Prophet ﷺ was sent, people began questioning one another, and Allah revealed the opening about “the great news.” Al-Ṭabarī records this account while explaining the questioning as Quraysh’s contention about the Prophet’s mission, the revelation he brought and resurrection.[2]
A weak account recorded by al-Qurṭubī, attributed through Abū Ṣāliḥ to Ibn ʿAbbās رضي الله عنهما, describes Quraysh sitting together after the Qurʾān was revealed and discussing it. Some affirmed it and others denied it; the account then connects their discussion with the revelation of the opening. This describes contrasting responses, rather than treating everyone who spoke about the message as having the same belief.[3]
An account of interrupted conversations
A collection of tafsīr from the early scholar Muqātil includes a detailed but unverified report naming Abū Lubābah and his companions. The text describes Meccan unbelievers gathering to hear the Prophet ﷺ, only to contradict and mock his words. It links their behavior to the rule against sitting with people who reject and make fun of Allah’s verses until they change the subject.
According to this story, the Prophet ﷺ then spoke only to the believers. If a polytheist appeared, he stopped speaking until that person left. The mocking group later returned together and asked if he was now holding back what he used to tell them. They asked him for stories of earlier peoples, saying they found his words remarkable.
The report states that the Prophet ﷺ refused to continue those conversations because his Lord had forbidden it. The text connects this specific encounter with the revelation of verses 1 and 2, identifying “the great news” as the Qurʾān.[4]
This passage gives no chain of transmission (isnād) for the event. Its rule against joining a mocking gathering also appears in the Makkan chapter al-Anʿām (6:68). Linking this rule only to the later chapter al-Nisāʾ (4:140) would create a timeline problem that the story itself does not require.[5]
3. Word-by-Word Analysis
Each row follows one word occurrence in the Arabic. The word meanings are Quran.com’s word-by-word translations, rather than the connected Saheeh International translation above.[1]
| Verse | Arabic word | Transliteration | Word meaning |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | عَمَّ | ʿamma | About what |
| 1 | يَتَسَآءَلُونَ | yatasāalūna | are they asking one another |
| 2 | عَنِ | ʿani | About |
| 2 | ٱلنَّبَإِ | l-naba-i | the News |
| 2 | ٱلْعَظِيمِ | l-ʿaẓīmi | the Great |
| 3 | ٱلَّذِى | alladhī | (About) which |
| 3 | هُمْ | hum | they |
| 3 | فِيهِ | fīhi | (are) concerning it |
| 3 | مُخْتَلِفُونَ | mukh'talifūna | (in) disagreement |
| 4 | كَلَّا | kallā | Nay |
| 4 | سَيَعْلَمُونَ | sayaʿlamūna | (soon) they will know |
| 5 | ثُمَّ | thumma | Then |
| 5 | كَلَّا | kallā | Nay |
| 5 | سَيَعْلَمُونَ | sayaʿlamūna | (soon) they will know |
4. Understanding the Verses
Verse 1: attention turns to the questioners
The opening places the question before us: عَمَّ يَتَسَآءَلُونَ, “About what are they asking one another?” Allah does not ask because their conversation is unknown to Him. The question draws attention to what occupies them and prepares us for the importance of the answer. Before the news is named, we are made to consider it (al-Zamakhsharī, al-Rāzī, Ibn ʿĀshūr).[1]
The hearers’ questioning has a different purpose from this divine question. They are discussing a message brought by the Prophet ﷺ, but discussion can express several responses. A person may deny it outright, wonder whether it could be true, or question in order to ridicule it. The rebuke that follows most directly confronts the opponents of the message. It does not require us to imagine that every questioner had precisely the same intention (Ibn ʿUthaymīn, al-Biqāʿī, Ibn ʿĀshūr).[2]
Verses 2–3: the news is great, though its hearers differ
The answer names ٱلنَّبَإِ ٱلْعَظِيمِ, al-nabaʾ al-ʿaẓīm, “the great news.” A nabaʾ is news or an announcement; here its description as “great” directs attention to its importance. This is not an ordinary item of conversation. It concerns what will happen to human beings after death (al-Rāzī).[3]
Some early authorities identify the news as the Qurʾān. Mujāhid gives this explanation, and Muqātil calls it great because it is Allah’s speech. Al-Wāḥidī also reasons from the hearers’ disagreement: their conflicting accusations of poetry, magic and divination concerned the revelation brought to them. Another explanation identifies the news with the Prophet’s ﷺ mission. Question 3 in Deeper Study develops these arguments (Mujāhid, Muqātil, al-Wāḥidī; al-Zamakhsharī records the mission explanation).[4]
Resurrection and the coming Judgment give the most direct explanation of the passage. The sūrah first warns that the questioners will know. It then recalls the earth, human creation and other signs of Allah’s power. These signs answer the doubt that the dead can be raised. The sequence leads to an appointed Day of Decision. Resurrection therefore explains both the warning and the evidence that follows it (al-Rāzī, al-Qurṭubī, Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī, al-Saʿdī).[5]
Verse 3 adds ٱلَّذِى هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ, “That over which they are in disagreement.” The truth of the announcement and the hearers’ response are two different matters. Some reject resurrection; others are uncertain. Those opposed to the Prophet ﷺ may also give different explanations for his message and different reasons for refusing it. Their opposition need not amount to one consistent account (Ibn ʿUthaymīn, al-Rāzī).[6]
Their disagreement does not make the news uncertain. It describes their response to it. The next verses turn from what they say to what they will come to know.
Verses 4–5: the questioning is answered by a warning
كَلَّا, kallā, “No!”, interrupts that response. In this context it is a rebuke: the denial and dismissive questioning are not accepted. What follows is not an invitation to continue treating resurrection as a remote possibility: سَيَعْلَمُونَ, sayaʿlamūn, “They are going to know” (al-Qurṭubī, Ibn ʿĀshūr).[7]
Knowing here is more than learning a new fact. Those who denied the announcement will encounter its truth and the consequences of their denial. The signs of Allah’s power can be considered now; the promised encounter is still ahead. That difference explains why a statement about knowledge becomes a warning (al-Qāsimī, Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Biqāʿī).[8]
The warning is repeated: ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “Then, no! They are going to know.” Repetition confirms its certainty, and ثُمَّ, thumma, “then,” heightens the force of the second warning. It is as though the hearer is stopped once more from passing lightly over what has been said (Abū al-Suʿūd, Ibn ʿĀshūr; al-Zarkashī on renewed warning).[9]
Other explanations distinguish two times or two groups addressed by the warnings, as discussed in Question 7 (al-Ālūsī records explanations involving different times; al-Ṭabarī records an explanation ascribed to al-Ḍaḥḥāk through a disputed route).[10]
5. Thematic Connections
From al-Mursalāt to al-Nabaʾ
Al-Mursalāt closes by asking:
﴿فَبِأَيِّ حَدِيثِۭ بَعۡدَهُۥ يُؤۡمِنُونَ ٥٠﴾“Then in what statement after the Qur'an will they believe?” (77:50, Saheeh International.)[1]
Al-Nabaʾ opens with people questioning the great news. The connection is between a message they are called to believe and the announcement they resist. The Qurʾān tells them of resurrection; the opening confronts their response to that announcement. Both sūrahs warn those who deny the coming Judgment.[2]
The Sūrah Introduction, section 5, and Deeper Study, Question 1, explain the more detailed correspondences.
From the warning to the signs of creation
After verses 1–5, the sūrah turns to the earth, the mountains, human creation, sleep, night and day, the heavens and rain. These are not a change to an unrelated subject. The One who has created and ordered human life has the power to restore it after death. The signs give reasons for believing the announcement just made.[3]
They also recall the gifts by which life is made possible. The questioners are not considering a Creator wholly unknown to them: they live amid His works and depend on His provision. The movement is from the news they question to the evidence before them, then toward the Day when they will encounter what they were warned about.[4]
6. Gems and Subtleties
Gem 1
Great news is not something to quarrel over.
The verse calls the news ٱلْعَظِيمِ, “great,” and in the next breath says that they are مُخْتَلِفُونَ, “in disagreement,” over it. The first word gives the news its weight. The second rebukes them. News of such weight deserves that every hearer accept it and attend to it, not doubt it and make it a ground for dispute. Al-Biqāʿī says it directly: what is great should not be disagreed over in any way.[1]
He then gives the reason. A person of integrity does not enter any matter without clear sight. The greater the matter, the harder he must search for its proofs, and nothing should concern him more than this news. How much worse, then, when the proofs are recited to him and he resists them and argues.[2]
Gem 2
Every piece of news comes true in its time.
The word for the news in verse 2, nabaʾ, meets the same promise in two other places in the Qurʾān. “For every news is a finality; and you are going to know” (6:67). “And you will surely know [the truth of] its information after a time” (38:88), where “its information” is the same word, nabaʾ. Al-Nabaʾ follows that course. It opens on “the great news” and answers the questioners twice: “No! They are going to know. Then, no! They are going to know.”
A report does not stay a report forever. If it is true, its truth is shown, even if only after a time; if it is false, its falsehood is shown.[3] They passed this news among themselves as a question. The answer tells them that it is coming, and that on the Day of Resurrection the truth of what they denied will be laid open before them.[4]
Gem 3
He asks what He already knows.
A question from man seeks what he lacks. A question from Allah seeks nothing — it reveals. «عَمَّ يَتَسَاءَلُونَ», "About what are they asking one another?" Then, from the same Speaker: «عَنِ النَّبَإِ الْعَظِيمِ», "About the great news" (78:1–2). Not one word of it needed to travel to reach Him.
They question one another; He names the thing they question. The question gathers our attention to their noise; the answer reminds us that none of it was ever outside His knowledge.[5]
Gem 4
Some questions are doors left open for others to walk through. These are not.
"About what are they asking one another?" and the answer follows without waiting for theirs: "About the great news" (78:1–2). The question is asked in heaven's voice and answered in heaven's voice. So too the Prophet ﷺ is commanded: «قُلْ أَيُّ شَيْءٍ أَكْبَرُ شَهَادَةً قُلِ اللَّهُ», "Say: What thing is greatest in testimony? Say: Allah" (6:19). The argument is not left hanging in the air for men to finish. What settles a matter is not the last voice in the room, but the testimony above all voices .[6]
Gem 5
It questioned their god and their grave.
«النَّبَإِ الْعَظِيمِ», "the great news," did not arrive as information. It stood before their idols and declared: these are not gods. It stood before their graves and declared: this is not the end. It struck the two pillars their lives rested on, whom they worshipped now, and what would become of them when life closed. Accepting it meant more than saying "this is from Allah." It meant leaving the altar of their present and facing the awakening. That is why they denied its source and united against His Messenger ﷺ: a man will argue with a message long before he surrenders the life the message asks for.[7]
7. Contemporary Applications
Answer the question the learner is asking
Imagine a child or an adult learner who has just watched a short video ridiculing resurrection. They ask, “How can people be raised after their bodies have decayed?” A parent or teacher may assume that the learner has accepted the video’s ridicule. Yet the learner may be asking for an explanation, not denying what Allah has revealed.
The distinction matters in this passage. Al-Māturīdī considers people whose difficulty concerning resurrection calls for clarification. Ibn ʿĀshūr distinguishes questions seeking knowledge or confirmation from questions used to mock. The same outward form, a question, can express different intentions.[1]
A helpful first response is, “Which part is difficult for you to understand?” Listen to the answer before responding. If the difficulty concerns Allah’s power to restore the dead, follow the sūrah’s own movement: it directs attention to the One who created human beings and ordered the world in which they live. The One who created them has the power to restore them after death.[2]
Take the announcement seriously by helping the learner consider its evidence. Address the actual difficulty, rather than letting a reaction to the video’s tone leave the learner’s question unanswered.
8. Common Misconceptions
“Do unwanted thoughts mean that I have adopted disbelief?”
An uninvited thought is not a belief.
A shadow crossing the courtyard does not darken the house, and a bird crossing the sky does not build a nest there.
Unbelief is not what enters the mind; it is what the heart accepts. The question is never whether the thought came, it comes, even to the sincere, for that is where the whisperer goes to work. The question is whether you believed it true, whether you assented to what it suggested about Allah.
Hatred of the thought is itself the answer. What you despise and push away cannot own you; the heart that flees from the whisper has already testified against it.[1]
What the hadith teaches
Abū Hurayrah رضي الله عنه relates that the Prophet ﷺ said:
إِنَّ اللَّهَ تَجَاوَزَ عَنْ أُمَّتِي مَا حَدَّثَتْ بِهِ أَنْفُسَهَا، مَا لَمْ تَعْمَلْ أَوْ تَتَكَلَّمْ“Allah has pardoned my community for what their souls say within them, so long as they do not act upon it or speak it.”[2]
In another hadith, some Companions told the Prophet ﷺ that they found thoughts within themselves which they felt were too grave to utter. He asked whether they had indeed experienced this. When they answered yes, he said:
ذَاكَ صَرِيحُ الْإِيمَانِ“That is clear faith.”[3]
The Companions came to the Prophet ﷺ troubled by these thoughts and asked him about them. They were seeking guidance, not affirming the thoughts as their beliefs. Their account shows why asking for help about an unwanted thought must not be confused with accepting it.
Ibn Taymiyyah explains that the sign of faith is their strong aversion to these thoughts and their resistance to them. They are troubled because the thoughts contradict what they believe about Allah. The praise is for rejecting the thoughts, not for their mere appearance.[4]
An unwanted thought is not an accepted belief
Ibn ʿUthaymīn illustrates the disturbance with ordinary knowledge of distant cities. A person accepts that such cities exist without being troubled by recurring suggestions that they do not. Why, then, do thoughts about faith become so disturbing? He explains that Shayṭān seeks to undermine the believer’s faith, rather than unsettle ordinary knowledge of cities. In the case he is answering, the disturbance is directed against a belief the person already accepts. Its recurrence is not evidence that the person has abandoned that belief.
He gives another comparison: a person washes a garment and then repeatedly imagines that it has become impure. A recurring suspicion, without evidence, does not establish that the garment is impure. In the same way, the person in his answer must distinguish what they actually believe from the unwanted suggestions that disturb them.[5]
His advice is practical:
- Seek Allah’s protection and stop pursuing the unwanted thoughts.
- Remember Allah and resist continued preoccupation with them.
- Give attention to worship and work that seeks Allah’s pleasure.
- Ask Allah to grant relief.[6]
The warning in al-Nabaʾ must therefore not be used to tell a person who hates and rejects an unwanted thought that they have adopted the denial described here. Deliberate rejection of resurrection and distress over a thought one repudiates are different responses.
9. Points for Reflection
What am I seeking when I ask?
A question can begin an honest search for understanding. It can also become a way of repeating an objection while refusing to consider the answer. When I ask about resurrection, am I willing to consider the answer and its reasons? Or am I only looking for another way to dismiss it?[1]
What would change if I took the warning seriously?
سَيَعْلَمُونَ, sayaʿlamūn, “They are going to know,” turns our attention toward an encounter still ahead. Consider one decision that can be made today: an obligation to fulfill, a wrong to put right, or a choice between obedience and disobedience. How would taking resurrection and Judgment seriously change that decision? The passage asks us to face now a truth that will not remain merely a subject of conversation.[2]
Deeper Study
1. The Questions These Verses Raise
These Questions begin with the opening’s place between al-Mursalāt and the signs of creation. They then follow the five verses closely: who asks, what the news is, how its hearers differ, and what the warning means.
| Question | What needs explaining | Conclusion |
|---|---|---|
| Q1. How does the opening connect with the surrounding passages? | How the opening continues al-Mursalāt and leads into the signs of creation. | The warning continues the preceding sūrah’s challenge; the signs answer the denial of resurrection and lead toward the appointed judgment. |
| Q2. Who is asking, and why open with a question? | Allah asks about people who are themselves asking; these two acts of questioning serve different purposes. | The opening draws attention to the greatness of the news. The warning most directly addresses its opponents, whose questioning need not all have the same intention. |
| Q3. What is “the great news”? | How the disputed announcement relates to the warning and the evidence of creation that follows. | Many early explanations identify the Qurʾān. Al-Rāzī and other commentators prefer resurrection because of the warning, the ensuing proofs and the appointed Judgment; Ibn ʿĀshūr understands the announcement more broadly. |
| Q4. What does their disagreement consist of? | Shared opposition does not necessarily mean identical beliefs or reasons. | Al-Ālūsī prefers firm deniers contrasted with doubters; he rejects Abū al-Suʿūd’s alternative of their shared opposition to the Prophet ﷺ as less consistent with the wording. |
| Q5. What does kallā reject or affirm? | The particle can look back in rebuke or introduce what follows, affecting both meaning and pausing. | Al-Ṭabarī, al-Zamakhsharī and al-Qurṭubī explain a rebuke. In this setting, rejection of the hearers’ denial leads directly into the warning. |
| Q6. What will they come to know? | What is left unspoken after “they will know,” and why knowledge becomes a warning. | They will encounter the truth they denied and the consequences of denying it. Evidence is available now; the promised encounter is still ahead. |
| Q7. Why is the warning repeated, and what does thumma add? | Whether the second warning increases the force of the first or points to a different experience. | Al-Wāḥidī prefers renewed threat; al-Zamakhsharī explains the second warning as stronger. The repetition confirms the warning, while thumma heightens its force. |
Q1. How does the opening connect with the surrounding passages?
Al-Mursalāt closes with a challenge to those who refuse the Qurʾān; al-Nabaʾ opens by confronting their questioning. It then moves from warning to the earth, human creation and the conditions of daily life, before announcing the appointed Day. Why is that the order? The hearers are first confronted with what they reject, then with what they already know. This Question follows that movement: the connection between the two sūrahs, the turn to creation, and the way its signs lead toward judgment. Q3 develops the arguments those signs give for identifying “the great news.”
1. How does it continue al-Mursalāt?
The preceding sūrah closes:
﴿فَبِأَيِّ حَدِيثِۭ بَعۡدَهُۥ يُؤۡمِنُونَ ٥٠﴾“Then in what statement after the Qur'an will they believe?” (77:50, Saheeh International.)[1]
Al-Nabaʾ then opens:
﴿عَمَّ يَتَسَآءَلُونَ﴾“About what are they asking one another?”﴿عَنِ ٱلنَّبَإِ ٱلْعَظِيمِ﴾“About the great news -” (78:1–2, Saheeh International.)
On the interpretation that the news is the Qurʾān, the connection is direct: the message they refuse at the end of al-Mursalāt is the message they question at the beginning of al-Nabaʾ. On the resurrection interpretation, the connection runs through what the Qurʾān announces: the deniers are confronted with the Day they refuse to acknowledge. Al-Ālūsī records the first explanation but prefers resurrection because the signs that follow demonstrate the power to raise the dead.[2]
That connection extends beyond the two opening questions. Al-Mursalāt repeatedly warns those who deny; al-Nabaʾ confronts the same refusal with “they will know.” The warning is not left without evidence. Both sūrahs ask their hearers to consider human creation and the earth: compare 77:20 and 77:25 with 78:6–8. Al-Suyūṭī draws attention to these corresponding questions.[3] What people can recognize in their present life answers their resistance to what has been announced about the next. Abū Jaʿfar ibn al-Zubayr al-Gharnāṭī follows that movement from warning through creation’s wisdom to the appointed Day.[4]
The later sūrah also develops what the earlier one announces briefly. Al-Mursalāt names and magnifies يَوْمِ الْفَصْلِ, “the Day of Decision,” in 77:12–14. Al-Nabaʾ names that same Day as an appointed time in 78:17, then describes the gathering. “The Day of Judgement” in the translation of these passages and “the Day of Decision” name the same Day. The connection is therefore not simply that both sūrahs mention resurrection: a warning already heard is followed by further evidence and a fuller account of its fulfilment.[5] The comparison below follows these connections through the two sūrahs; the Introduction, section 5, treats their place in the whole sūrah.
| Connection | How the passages develop it |
|---|---|
| The rejected message becomes the subject of questioning. | “Statement” in 77:50 and “great news” in 78:2 refer to the same Qurʾān on this interpretation. Al-Ālūsī reports this connection while preferring resurrection as the news.[6] |
| Warning follows evidence already given. | For al-Biqāʿī, rejection is especially grave after the Qurʾān’s eloquence, order, knowledge of the unseen and wisdom have established its divine source. The renewed warning also leads through creation’s wisdom to the appointed Day and its different outcomes.[7] |
| Corresponding questions recall recognizable signs. | Earlier peoples, human creation and the earth in 77:16–17, 20 and 25 prepare for the signs in 78:6–16. Al-Suyūṭī compares this correspondence with the questions recalling gifts in al-Ḍuḥā and al-Sharḥ.[8] |
| An announced Day receives fuller description. | The Day of Decision in 77:12–14 becomes the appointed gathering in 78:17–18; both sūrahs distinguish the righteous from the deniers.[9] |
| Present provision leads toward the return. | The ordering of human life and the judgment to come belong to one argument. Al-Nasafī’s al-Taysīr connects the arrangements for life; a manuscript variant instead refers to preparation for the return.[10] |
| The shared warning extends beyond the openings. | Muḥammad Fārūq al-Zayn pairs the Day of Decision (77:38; 78:17), restricted speech before Allah (77:35–36; 78:37), and the warning’s certainty (77:7; 78:40).[11] |
2. Why turn from warning to the earth?
These correspondences help explain why the opening itself moves from warning to creation. Before calling its hearers to acknowledge the earth, it warns them:
﴿كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٤﴾“No! They are going to know.” (78:4, Saheeh International.)
After its repetition in verse 5, the sūrah asks:
﴿أَلَمۡ نَجۡعَلِ ٱلۡأَرۡضَ مِهَٰدٗا ٦﴾“Have We not made the earth a resting place?” (78:6, Saheeh International.)[12]
This is not a change of subject. The people question an event they have not witnessed, so they are asked to consider creation they cannot deny. The question calls for acknowledgment: the earth has indeed been made a place where they can live.
The turn from speaking about the questioners to addressing them, and the fresh question that supplies the proof, are explained in 78:8, Balāghah.[13]
Why begin with the earth? It is both their present home and the place from which the dead will emerge. Its preparation for sitting, resting and walking shows more than the existence of a powerful Maker: it shows care for those who inhabit it. The question therefore gives them two reasons to reconsider. The evidence answers their denial of resurrection; the reminder of Allah’s favor calls them to listen to His Messenger (Ibn ʿĀshūr).[14]
The signs give the warning its answer: the One who made this life has the power and knowledge to restore it, while revelation announces that the return will occur.[15] Their joined provision also calls the hearers to acknowledge one Lord, thank Him and respond to His guidance; the full argument, including the distinction between divine wisdom and an obligation imposed upon Allah, is developed in 78:6–7, Q2.[16] Sleep gives a familiar likeness of interruption and return without ceasing to be a gift of rest; 78:9, Q1 examines how those two aspects fit together.[17]
3. Where does the sequence lead?
After the signs, the sūrah states:
﴿إِنَّ يَوۡمَ ٱلۡفَصۡلِ كَانَ مِيقَٰتٗا ١٧﴾“Indeed, the Day of Judgement is an appointed time -” (78:17, Saheeh International.)[18]
The Day questioned at the beginning is now named as an appointment. The intervening signs have answered the objection to Allah’s power and directed attention to His knowledge, wisdom and gifts. The appointment also answers impatience with the warning: resurrection and recompense will occur at their fixed time. Because the context concerns that restoration and recompense, Abū al-Suʿūd rejects explaining the appointment merely as the time at which worldly life ends.[19]
The turn to creation answers the questioning; it does not interrupt the warning. The appointed Day is the destination toward which that answer leads, while the reminder of gifts calls the hearers to respond before they meet it. And Allah knows best.
Q2. Who is asking, and why open with a question?
﴿عَمَّ يَتَسَآءَلُونَ ١﴾“About what are they asking one another?” (78:1, Saheeh International).[1]
There are two questions here: the people ask about the news, and Allah asks about their questioning. The first reveals how they receive the announcement. The second draws our attention to its importance and to their response. We first need to understand how Allah’s question prepares for the answer in verse 2. We can then ask who the people are, whom they ask, and what their questions intend.
1. Why does Allah ask?
The next verse names the subject: the great news. The question and its answer come from the same speaker. Allah is therefore not asking someone else to complete His knowledge. First raising the question helps the hearer grasp the answer. Al-Rāzī illustrates this teaching method through the question and answer within 40:16:
﴿لِّمَنِ ٱلْمُلْكُ ٱلْيَوْمَ﴾“To whom belongs [all] sovereignty this Day?”﴿لِلَّهِ ٱلْوَٰحِدِ ٱلْقَهَّارِ﴾“To Allah, the One, the Prevailing.” (Excerpt, Saheeh International.)
The question directs attention to who possesses sovereignty; the answer then declares Allah’s sole sovereignty. It teaches through question and answer, rather than seeking information from another speaker.[2]
A question can make the truth known to its hearers rather than obtain information for its speaker.[3] Allah asks Jesus:
﴿ءَأَنتَ قُلْتَ لِلنَّاسِ ٱتَّخِذُونِي وَأُمِّيَ إِلَٰهَيْنِ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ﴾“did you say to the people, ‘Take me and my mother as deities besides Allah?’”
Jesus’s reply includes:
﴿إِن كُنتُ قُلْتُهُۥ فَقَدْ عَلِمْتَهُۥ﴾“If I had said it, You would have known it.” (Excerpts from 5:116, Saheeh International.)
The reply itself excludes ignorance in Allah. The question confronts the people with the claim made about Jesus; it is not asked because Allah lacks knowledge of what he said. Al-Rāghib uses this example to distinguish knowledge produced in the people hearing a question from knowledge supposedly acquired by the One asking it.[4]
Once we distinguish the hearer’s knowledge from Allah’s knowledge, we can see why the answer is delayed. Asking first makes the hearer wait; calling the subject “the great news” then directs that attention toward a matter of immense consequence. Ibn ʿĀshūr explains how this progression fixes the meaning more firmly in the mind.[5]
The same speaker can ask and then answer without waiting for anyone else to reply. Ibn ʿĀshūr illustrates this with poetry by Ḥassān b. Thābit:
لِمَنِ الدَّارُ أَقْفَرَتْ بِمَعَانِ ... بَيْنَ أَعْلَى الْيَرْمُوكِ وَالصَّمَّانِذَاكَ مَغْنَى لِآلِ جَفْنَة فِي الده ... ر وَحَقٌّ تَقَلُّبُ الْأَزْمَانِ“Whose dwelling lies deserted at Maʿān, between upper Yarmūk and al-Ṣammān? That was the abode of the house of Jafnah in former time; the turning of ages is a truth.”
The poetry first asks whose dwelling it is, then names its people. The poet already knows the answer. His question draws attention to what he is about to identify. This is the feature Ibn ʿĀshūr compares with the opening of al-Nabaʾ: a question prepares the hearer for the answer given by the same speaker.[6]
The question can do more than prepare for an identification. Although we normally ask what something is because we do not understand it, a known matter can also exceed our understanding because of its greatness. In both cases, the mind has not fully comprehended it. That likeness explains how a question can magnify something already known (al-Rāzī).[7]
A related comparison begins with something that has no equal. We usually recognize a thing by placing it beside familiar examples. If it is without a peer, that comparison fails, and we may speak as though we must ask what kind of thing it is. Al-Zamakhsharī illustrates this with “Zayd, what is Zayd!” The words are not a request to identify a man whose name has just been given. They express how far he exceeds an ordinary estimate. Applied to the opening, this explains how an interrogative can magnify its subject even in the speech of the One from whom nothing is hidden.[8]
This magnifying effect also appears when a question makes the hearer wonder at an event before naming it. The preceding sūrah asks:
﴿لِأَيِّ يَوْمٍ أُجِّلَتْ ١٢﴾“For what Day was it postponed?” (77:12)﴿لِيَوْمِ ٱلْفَصْلِ ١٣﴾“For the Day of Judgement.” (77:13, Saheeh International.)
The question draws attention to the appointed Day before the answer names it. Al-Farrāʾ compares this with al-Nabaʾ’s question followed by “the great news,” describing the question as an expression of wonder. Ibn Qutaybah makes the same comparison under taʿajjub, wonder. He treats this separately from questions of confirmation and questions of rebuke. Abū Ḥayyān brings these purposes together: the question magnifies the news, makes its gravity felt, establishes the matter before the hearer and expresses wonder.[9]
A question may seek information, lead someone to acknowledge a truth, reject a claim, or rebuke an action. These purposes must be distinguished, as ʿAbd al-Raḥmān Ḥabannakah al-Maydānī explains. Here the answer magnifies the news, while the later warning confronts the people’s response to it.[10] Wonder draws attention to the extraordinary matter; rebuke challenges the questioners’ treatment of it. Ibn Qutaybah places the passage under wonder, whereas al-Nasafī’s al-Taysīr explains rebuke.[11]
2. Does verse 2 answer the question?
Question followed by answer gives the opening its clearest progression: “About what are they asking? About the great news.” The first verse asks for the subject; the second identifies it. Ibn Juzayy prefers this construction as more eloquent and skilful, and connects it with pausing at the end of verse 1.[12]
The alternatives ask why the people question the news, renew the question, or treat the second phrase as a substitution. They remain possible constructions, but defending a substitution does not remove the advantage of an answer: each verse has a distinct task, and the news is named after the hearer has been made to wait. This is the progression preferred by Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī.[13] The full constructions, objections and replies are in Iʿrāb, §2; their effect on attention is explained under “Expectation followed by clarification”.
3. Who are “they”?
Having identified what they ask about, we still need to identify the “they” in يَتَسَاءَلُونَ. No named group precedes that pronoun within this sūrah. Yet the hearer can recognize the polytheists already familiar from the Qurʾān’s address; they need not be named again. Ibn ʿĀshūr also considers a turn from addressing those people in the preceding sūrah to speaking about them here.[14]
The warning helps identify the group more precisely. The people who ask, those described as differing, and those who will come to know are naturally understood as the same people. Taking the last statement as a threat therefore points back to the opponents of the announcement.[15] This is al-Rāzī’s argument for the unbelieving audience. A broader interpretation includes believers asking to deepen certainty as well as opponents asking in ridicule or raising objections. Al-Maẓharī distinguishes greater certainty from mockery; al-Nīsābūrī includes believers seeking greater fear and readiness.[16] On that broader interpretation, the questioning includes both groups, but the threat addresses the deniers.[17]
Through a broken route from al-Ḍaḥḥāk from Ibn ʿAbbās, al-Qurṭubī reports another identification: Jews who asked the Prophet ﷺ about many things, whose disagreement is then confronted by the warning.[18] Al-Ḍaḥḥāk did not meet Ibn ʿAbbās, so this report does not establish a particular occasion of revelation. The contextual argument for the Meccan opponents rests instead on the continuity between the people questioning, differing and receiving the threat.[19]
4. Whom do they ask?
Identifying the questioners does not yet tell us whom they question. The ordinary reciprocal sense of yatasāʾalūn describes one asking another. It can describe a conversation without requiring every participant to ask and answer in turn. Consider the people of Paradise:
﴿وَأَقْبَلَ بَعْضُهُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ يَتَسَاءَلُونَ ٢٥﴾“And they will approach one another, inquiring of each other.” (52:25, Saheeh International.)
A separate passage shows how such conversation develops:
﴿قَالَ قَائِلٌ مِنْهُمْ إِنِّي كَانَ لِي قَرِينٌ ٥١﴾“A speaker among them will say, ‘Indeed, I had a companion [on earth]” (37:51)﴿يَقُولُ أَءِنَّكَ لَمِنَ ٱلْمُصَدِّقِينَ ٥٢﴾“Who would say, ‘Are you indeed of those who believe” (37:52)﴿أَءِذَا مِتْنَا وَكُنَّا تُرَابًا وَعِظَامًا أَءِنَّا لَمَدِينُونَ ٥٣﴾“That when we have died and become dust and bones, we will indeed be recompensed?’” (37:53, Saheeh International.)
One person recounts what an earlier companion used to ask. The exchange includes a remembered question within a story; it is not a fixed sequence in which each person must ask the next a new question. This is the conversational use al-Farrāʾ explains and al-Rāzī illustrates with these passages.[20]
The verb can also describe people directing questions to the Messenger ﷺ or the believers. Reciprocal action is not compulsory in every use of this form, and the person questioned may be left unexpressed. Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Qāsimī explain that linguistic possibility; al-Nīsābūrī includes mocking questions to the Messenger ﷺ and believers.[21] Nor must we choose between two incompatible events: people can question one another and mock those who affirm the news. Al-Zamakhsharī and Ibn Kamāl join the two actions.[22]
Al-Tustarī gives a particular paraphrase in which the Prophet ﷺ is the person questioned: “For what reason do you ask Muḥammad ﷺ?” He places it within a discussion of how Qurʾānic address reaches its intended people. His comparison is the opening of 65:1:
﴿يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِيُّ إِذَا طَلَّقْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَاءَ﴾“O Prophet, when you [Muslims] divorce women” (excerpt, Saheeh International).
“O Prophet” addresses one person; طَلَّقْتُمُ (ṭallaqtum), “you divorce,” addresses more than one. The command reaches the community through its Prophet. Al-Tustarī also considers descendants addressed concerning their ancestors’ conduct. His al-Nabaʾ paraphrase, لأي علة تسألون محمدا, turns the question directly upon the questioners themselves, adding that the Prophet ﷺ knows the matter best.[23]
Mutual questioning remains the primary explanation in Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī: it is what the reciprocal verb most directly describes.[24]
5. Are all their questions mockery?
Whether the question is put to a neighbour or to a believer, its outward form does not settle its purpose. A person may seek an unfamiliar detail, confirmation, or another person’s view. Another may ridicule something he has already rejected. Ibn ʿĀshūr illustrates the latter with a staged exchange about whether someone has heard the resurrection news or what the Messenger has said. Questions are really being exchanged, but obtaining information is not their purpose.
Genuine inquiry and mocking inquiry express different states of mind. Some hearers could still be uncertain; others could already be convinced that the announced event would never occur. Because their denial had different degrees, Ibn ʿĀshūr prefers to understand the verse as including both genuine inquiry and performed inquiry, rather than choosing only one of the two explanations. The distinction explains why the same visible act can have different intentions.[25]
There is also a fuller possibility in which inquiry leads out of doubt. A difficulty may prompt people to ask because they want it explained. The signs of Allah’s blessings, power and governance that follow can then answer the difficulty: careful consideration directs them toward resurrection. On this interpretation, coming to know is the promised outcome of reflection. Al-Māturīdī proposes this conditionally, then sets beside it the person who refuses careful thought, neglects the signs and does not deal fairly with himself. That person faces the threatened consequence. The decisive difference is the response to the evidence: reflection can lead to faith, while deliberate neglect leaves the person facing the warning.[26]
Other commentators explain the rebuke more directly as a rejection of the inquiry before them. Al-Zamakhsharī and Abū al-Suʿūd describe questions asked in mockery or denial. On al-Maẓharī’s second explanation, the truth is so clear that belief, not further questioning, is called for. Quṭb and Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ likewise describe this opening as rejecting the questioners and their inquiry. They are explaining this encounter with the great news, rather than offering a general rule against every question about faith.[27]
Rejecting this inquiry does not make every question about faith blameworthy. The more consequential a matter is, the more seriously it deserves investigation: al-Biqāʿī reasons from the greatness of the news in precisely that direction. The varied proofs that follow give people grounds on which to consider resurrection (al-Qushayrī). By contrast, a question aimed at pushing truth away and supporting falsehood serves resistance rather than understanding (Ibn Fūrak). The fault is not that the news matters enough to ask about, but that questioning becomes a way of refusing to face its answer.[28]
The distinction is therefore between questioning that resists a clear truth and questioning that seeks to understand it. The first explanation stresses that such great news demands belief rather than mockery; the second asks what the questioner is trying to do. Al-Māturīdī allows inquiry that leads through reflection to faith, while Ibn Fūrak identifies the blameworthy aim as repelling truth and supporting falsehood. These are not rival judgments about whether understanding matters. They distinguish a serious search for truth from using a question to evade it. That also explains why the passage answers the questioners with evidence instead of leaving them with a rebuke alone.[29]
Conclusion
Allah’s question directs attention to the great news; the warning confronts the Meccan opponents’ response to it. The same people question, differ and receive the threat, which is why al-Rāzī identifies the opponents and Abū al-Suʿūd, Ibn Kamāl and al-Shawkānī reject including believers within that rebuked audience. And Allah knows best.[30]
Q3. What is “the great news”?
﴿عَنِ ٱلنَّبَإِ ٱلْعَظِيمِ ٢﴾“About the great news -” (78:2, Saheeh International).[1]
What does that description name: the resurrection, the Qurʾān announcing it, or the Messenger’s mission through which it reaches the hearers? These are connected, but identifying the announcement is not the same as identifying the event announced. The prophetic mission names the momentous development through which the news comes to them.[2] We begin with the expression itself, then examine the contextual argument for resurrection and the reasons for the other explanations. Finally, we distinguish an inclusive explanation from an identification or spiritual comparison that goes beyond these alternatives.
1. What makes this news “great”?
This is news that demands attention. Al-Rāghib distinguishes nabaʾ from the broader khabar, “report”: it is important, useful news that brings knowledge or a strong likelihood of truth. Common speech may use the two words interchangeably, but careful expression can retain that distinction. Ibn ʿĀshūr follows it here: nabaʾ draws attention to news of consequence.[3]
Al-Rāghib names reports free of falsehood as the proper examples of nabaʾ: وحق الخبر الذي يقال فيه نبأ أن يتعرى عن الكذب، كالتواتر، وخبر الله تعالى، وخبر النبي, “A report called nabaʾ should be free of falsehood, as in mass-transmitted reports, Allah’s report and the Prophet’s report.” His discussion of verification concerns a different case: in 49:6, a fāsiq, an unreliable wrongdoer, brings a weighty report. Its importance requires pausing to investigate, even when it seems likely to be true. This is not a call to doubt Allah’s news. Al-Samīn preserves both the simpler definition, “news,” and al-Rāghib’s qualified account.[4]
That narrower definition is not the only account of the word. Al-Zamakhsharī includes news, arrival and sound among its uses; Ibn Manẓūr gives “news” and includes the Qurʾān, resurrection and the Prophet’s affair as explanations of this passage. Al-Ṣābūnī, discussing 49:6, contrasts the general meaning with al-Rāghib’s more restricted definition.[5] The distinction raises two questions about the news described here: must it be important, and must it tell its hearer something previously unknown?
Importance is central to al-Rāghib’s definition, but an account of the root can begin with the arrival of information instead. Ibn Fāris connects it with coming from one place to another: news reaches a person from elsewhere, as a person or a sound does. His account does not require every use of the word to describe beneficial, truthful information. Muḥammad Ḥasan Jabal instead emphasizes something appearing after hiddenness: news brings into view what was not previously apparent. These explanations distinguish the arrival of news from its disclosure of something hidden.[6]
Two poetic witnesses make Ibn Fāris’s connection concrete. Dhū al-Rummah uses نَبْأَة (nabʾah) for a sound reaching a sensitive listener:
وقد توحَّس رِكزاً مُقْفِرٌ نَدُسٌ … بنبْأةِ الصوتِ ما في سمعِهِ كذبُ“A keen listener in a deserted place sensed a faint sound; in hearing that sound, his ear did not deceive him.”
The sound comes from elsewhere. In the next witness, نَابِئ (nābiʾ) describes someone arriving from elsewhere:
ولكن قَذَاها كلُّ أشعَثَ نابئٍ … أتَتْنا به الأقدار من حيث لا ندرِي“But what troubles it is every dishevelled newcomer whom fate has brought us from where we do not know.”
Ibn Fāris places these uses beside nabaʾ, “news”: a person, a sound and a report can all come to someone from another place. The poems illustrate his account of the root; the importance of this particular news comes from its description as “great” and from what the sūrah says about it.[7]
The arrival of a report does not always mean its contents are new to the recipient. Jabal tests Abū Hilāl’s distinction that nabaʾ tells the recipient what the recipient does not know. Jesus tells people what they eat and store in their houses in 3:49. They already know those things; ordinarily, it is the speaker who would not know them. Jabal therefore modifies the condition: the matter was originally unknown to one of the two parties, not necessarily to its recipient.
How, then, does this explain Allah telling people about their own deeds? They performed those deeds and know what they did. Jabal points to 41:22: they supposed that Allah did not know much of their conduct. Alternatively, they behaved as people unaware of its reality. The announcement confronts that mistaken estimate of their deeds and of Allah’s knowledge; it does not imply any prior ignorance in Allah. The objection and its answer show why “news” cannot simply be defined as information always unknown to the person hearing it.[8]
These qualifications concern nabaʾ, the news. Its description as “great” makes its importance explicit, whichever definition of the noun is adopted. Greatness can describe bodily size or a matter’s importance: a great matter occupies the mind as a large body fills the view. Here the news concerns unseen realities and the terrors announced in revelation, not the physical size of a report.[9]
This extension from size to importance helps explain the relationship between عَظِيم (ʿaẓīm), “great,” and عَظْم (ʿaẓm), “bone,” which share the root ع ظ م. One explanation begins with enlarged bone and extends greatness to what can be sensed or understood: this is al-Rāghib’s account. Another begins with greatness and strength and explains bone by its hardness: this is Ibn Fāris’s account. Jabal allows bulk and solidity, leaving more than one explanation for the naming of bone. The starting points differ, but none confines greatness to physical dimensions. Ibn Manẓūr also includes describing news as momentous. Thus the adjective can express the importance of what is announced.[10]
A poetic witness shows the root describing a grave predicament rather than a large object:
إن تنجُ منها تنجُ من ذِى عظيمةٍ … وإلاّ فإنِّى لا إخالَك ناجيا“If you escape it, you escape a grave ordeal; otherwise, I do not think you will escape.”
The witness turns on عَظِيمَة (ʿaẓīmah), which Ibn Fāris explains as a severe calamity. It supports understanding greatness as seriousness and consequence, not only physical size.[11]
Yet importance alone does not decide which of the principal explanations is intended. The opening calls its subject great and disputed without immediately naming the event. That description deepens attention before the subject is fully disclosed. The repeated “they will know” also leaves its object unspoken. For Quṭb, that implicit threat is more fearsome than an immediate account of everything awaiting them. Description and warning prepare the hearer for the proof and scenes that follow.[12] Those following verses are therefore the next place to look for the identity of the news.
2. Why is resurrection the strongest explanation?
The sequence of the sūrah. The opening does not leave the news unexplained. First comes the warning that its opponents will know. Then come the signs of Allah’s creation and provision. After these, the Day of Decision is announced and its scenes begin to unfold. The question, warning, proof and description belong to one movement. Resurrection connects them naturally: the people question whether it will happen; the warning declares that they will encounter it; creation demonstrates the power to bring it about; and the later verses describe the Day itself. Verse 17 is especially clear evidence for this connection, which al-Qurṭubī considers the more apparent explanation.[13]
Al-Biqāʿī makes the identification explicit at verse 17: إِنَّ يَوْمَ الْفَصْلِ, “Indeed, the Day of Judgement,” names the Day “which is the great news.” The Day announced in al-Mursalāt 77:13 and the Day described here are the same appointed judgment, not two different Days.[14]
In the explanation al-Ṭabarī records from Ibn Zayd, the deniers do not dispute death; they reject coming to life again with their ancestors. The great news concerns an event still before them, which their present experience of death leads them to dismiss. Qatādah’s explanation of resurrection after death addresses that same question.[15]
Verse 3 gives another reason. Ibn Kathīr understands its disagreement as affirmation and denial, and uses that contrast to prefer resurrection. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wasīṭ takes a different route from the same verse: the conflicting accusations of magic, poetry and divination favour identifying the news as the Qurʾān. The disagreement is therefore not merely over a name. Each interpretation explains a different kind of disagreement and uses it as evidence for the subject of the passage.[16]
The disagreement alone has not settled the choice between resurrection and the Qurʾān. The signs that follow give a further reason: they answer the deniers’ objection to restoration. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim identifies four proofs of resurrection in them, then observes that verse 17 explicitly names the Day of Decision. This is why he prefers resurrection even after explaining how mission, Qurʾān and resurrection imply one another.[17]
He also argues from the intensity of the dispute: recognition of the Qurʾān’s eloquence and of the Messenger’s truthfulness could coexist with an especially strong refusal to believe that decayed bodies would be restored. The objection voiced in 50:2–3 turns from astonishment at a human warner to the supposed remoteness of returning after death and becoming dust. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim’s comparison explains why the coming signs answer the objection to resurrection so directly.[18]
His fourth proof appeals to instances of life restored in this world. In the first event, a man had been killed and the Israelites disputed the crime. Allah commanded them to strike him with part of the slaughtered cow:
﴿كَذَٰلِكَ يُحْيِ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمَوْتَىٰ﴾“Thus does Allāh bring the dead to life” (2:73).[19]
In the second, Ibrāhīm asked to see how Allah gives life to the dead. He was instructed to take four birds, distribute portions of them upon the hills and call them:
﴿ثُمَّ ٱدْعُهُنَّ يَأْتِينَكَ سَعْيًا﴾“then call them - they will come [flying] to you in haste” (2:260).[20]
These are instances of restoration after actual death. Sleep and waking provide a resemblance rather than another instance of actual death, a distinction developed in 78:9, Q2.
The signs also explain why the disputed news concerns a future life. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī takes their evidence of power, knowledge and wisdom, together with the analogies of waking and renewed vegetation, as reasons to favour resurrection over the Qurʾān and the mission. Al-Shawkānī likewise identifies resurrection as their immediate subject, while recognizing that they also teach tawḥīd and support the Messenger.[21]
Both the proof from power and the argument from wisdom thus connect creation to resurrection, though their premises must be distinguished. That connection gives the preceding warning particular force: the people will discover what they now deny, when knowing will no longer benefit them as acceptance now would. Al-Rāzī joins this threatened disclosure to the purpose of the following proof and to the adjective “great.” The Day on which humanity stands before the Lord of the worlds (83:4–6) deserves that description; the great news from which people turn away in 38:67–68 gives a further parallel. His preference rests on these three reasons together: the disclosure threatened, the restoration proved possible, and the greatness of the Day.[22]
The case for resurrection thus depends on the relation between the passages, not on the number of commentators who adopt it. The warning promises an encounter, creation answers the objection to restoration, and verse 17 names the Day. Al-Qurṭubī prefers this explanation while also reporting the Qurʾān and the Prophet’s affair as alternatives; recognizing those alternatives does not undo his contextual judgment.[23]
Power and purpose strengthen that connection in different ways. First creation answers the claim that restoration cannot happen; wise creation directs attention toward accountability. This is why explanations centred on resurrection and recompense can develop different features of the same sequence without assigning different subjects to “the great news.”[24]
3. Could the news be the Qurʾān?
The strength of that contextual explanation does not remove the alternative named at the outset: perhaps “the news” means the revelation announcing the event. Its greatness would then begin with its divine source. Questioning that revelation while opposing it and refusing belief exposes the contradiction in their response. This is how Muqātil understands the opening, with 38:67 as a parallel. The Qurʾān is the great announcement placed before them, and their acceptance or rejection explains the division.[25]
The early explanations.
The early evidence does not yield only one interpretation. Mujāhid’s Qurʾān explanation appears in the collected Tafsīr Mujāhid and in al-Bukhārī without its chain; al-Ṭabarī reports Qatādah for resurrection and Ibn Zayd for the coming Day, while ʿAbd al-Razzāq reports Qatādah through Maʿmar for the Qurʾān. These routes must be kept distinct. So must their assessments: the ḥasan judgment concerns Qatādah’s fuller affirmation-and-denial explanation, whereas the Ibn Kathīr editorial notes call his shorter resurrection explanation ṣaḥīḥ in isnad. Ibn Mardawayh’s two Ibn ʿAbbās routes both pass through the abandoned transmitter Ḥuṣayn ibn Mukhāriq; they cannot be added as sound support.[26]
The later accounts preserve several meanings. Comparing those meanings helps separate the interpretive question from the further question of whether a particular attribution has a sound route.
| Meaning attributed to early authorities | What the later accounts establish, and what they do not |
|---|---|
| The Qurʾān. | Mujāhid’s explanation appears repeatedly. Qatādah is also reported for it, but not through the same route as his resurrection explanation. The attribution through Abū Ṣāliḥ to Ibn ʿAbbās is weak. |
| Resurrection or the coming Day. | Qatādah and Ibn Zayd are named for these closely related descriptions; al-Samʿānī also attributes resurrection to Abū al-ʿĀliyah and al-Rabīʿ. |
| The Prophet’s affair or prophecy. | Some accounts leave the proponent unnamed; others attribute prophecy to al-Ḥasan. Ibn ʿĀdil also attributes the Prophet’s affair to Ibn ʿAbbās, but gives no chain here. |
| The whole revealed law, or connected announcements together. | Ibn ʿAṭiyyah attributes the whole law to Ibn ʿAbbās and Qatādah without giving a chain here. Muḥammad al-Hilāl allows the Qurʾān, resurrection, prophecy and tawḥīd separately or together. A later attribution identifies an interpretation; it does not by itself establish the strength of its transmission.[27] |
The interpretation of the news as the Qurʾān has early transmitted support, including Mujāhid’s explanation. Two different explanations are transmitted from Qatādah: the Qurʾān through Maʿmar, and resurrection through Saʿīd. The alternatives therefore arise within the early evidence itself, not simply from later efforts to explain the word.[28]
Al-Shawkānī likewise describes the Qurʾān explanation as مَرْوِيٌّ عَنْ جَمَاعَةٍ مِنَ التَّابِعِينَ, “transmitted from a group of the early scholars who followed the Companions.” He preserves that early interpretation even though his contextual argument favours resurrection.[29]
Al-Zarkashī and al-Suyūṭī also include “the great news” among the Qurʾān’s names, following the list associated with Shaydhala and citing these verses. The expression was therefore recognized as a name for the Qurʾān.[30]
Al-Rāzī examines two arguments for identifying the news as the Qurʾān and the replies to them. The first concerns the next verse’s description of disagreement. The opponents offered different accounts of the revelation: magic, poetry, or stories of earlier peoples. These competing descriptions seem to fit “that over which they are in disagreement” particularly well. If their rejection of resurrection and of the mission were uniform, the variety of their accusations against the Qurʾān would distinguish it as the object of this disagreement.[31]
Al-Rāzī answers that this premise is not secure: confident denial and uncertainty are different responses to resurrection. Even two people who deny it may have different ideas about what they are rejecting and why. Disagreement can therefore exist over resurrection as well as revelation. This answers the proposed contrast: the word “disagreement” fits the Qurʾān explanation, but it does not select that explanation by eliminating resurrection. Al-Rāzī rejects this first argument for that reason.[32]
The second argument he examines turns on the difference between a report and its subject: news is the report, whereas resurrection is the event reported. The Qurʾān consists of speech conveying news, whereas resurrection and prophethood are things about which that speech informs us. Its other designations, including remembrance, reminder, guidance and discourse, strengthen the connection between “the news” and the revelation itself.[33]
Al-Rāzī answers by considering what makes an announcement great: its importance can lie in the reality it describes, rather than in the words as sounds or expressions. Resurrection and prophethood are momentous realities. If the noun seems especially suitable for the report, the adjective seems especially suitable for what is reported.[34]
A defender of the Qurʾān explanation can reply, in al-Rāzī’s discussion, that its language is not an insignificant container for important information. Its eloquence and the many kinds of knowledge it encompasses are themselves grounds for calling it great. Nor does the adjective settle a strict literal contrast between language and events: greatness in the original sense of bodily size applies to neither. In both cases, it has been extended to importance. Thus neither side can settle the question simply by claiming the only possible literal fit for “great.”[35]
The lexical argument brings us back to the passage as a whole. Both uses can be explained, so the question becomes which gives the more direct account of the warning and proof. Here the resurrection explanation retains its strength. The vocabulary permits the Qurʾān interpretation; the context gives a reason to prefer resurrection. That is the conclusion of al-Rāzī’s examination of these arguments.[36]
Can the following proof also support the Qurʾān explanation? Perhaps the opponents rejected the revelation precisely because it announced resurrection. Proving resurrection would then address the reason for their rejection of the Qurʾān. The following proof would still fit, even if “the news” named the revelation rather than the event. This connects the alternative to the actual movement of the sūrah. Al-Ālūsī records this defence but finds it remote.[37]
What of the report that most commentators took it to be the Qurʾān? Several commentators report it directly: most took the great news to be the Qurʾān (al-Baghawī, al-Khāzin, al-Maẓharī), and al-Wāḥidī says "all the commentators."[38]
Those who prefer resurrection draw their answer from the passage itself. Resurrection is the more evident meaning, because the warning, the proof from creation and the Day of Decision that follow all concern the raising of the dead (al-Rāzī, Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī, al-Shawkānī, ʿAṭiyyah Sālim). Verse 3 reinforces this interpretation, since people divided over it into believers and deniers (Ibn Kathīr). Al-Qurṭubī also prefers it, and reports the argument from verse 17 from others.[39]
The inclusive interpretation, in which the Qurʾān and the truths it announces belong together, is examined in section 5 below.[40]
The Qurʾān explanation therefore has three connected grounds: the announcement is divine speech, its contents are momentous, and the opponents give conflicting accounts of it. It can also include resurrection within what the Prophet ﷺ brought, as al-Darrah explains. Its strength is not confined to the reported majority; it offers a reasoned account of both “news” and “disagreement,” even where the wider sequence gives resurrection the more direct contextual support.[41]
4. Could it mean the Messenger’s mission?
The two explanations considered so far name the event or its announcement. A third names the mission through which the announcement reached its hearers. A man from among them declared himself Allah’s messenger and called them to tawḥīd. The Qurʾān records their astonishment at a human warner in 50:2 and at the proclamation of tawḥīd in 38:5. On the prophetic-mission explanation, that startling development provokes the questioning: the great news is that Muḥammad ﷺ has come to them as a messenger from Allah.[42]
Which part of the message are they questioning? Is Muḥammad ﷺ a prophet? Is this Qurʾān from Allah? Can its opponents produce anything like it? Will the dead be raised? Is worship due to one God alone? To question the Qurʾān’s origin is not the same as to question whether its challenge can be met, although both concern the same revelation. Al-Māturīdī preserves these distinctions and declines to confine the opening categorically to one subject without adequate knowledge.[43]
The following gifts also explain why the mission is a possible subject: their recipients need guidance about how to thank their Lord, and the signs answer objections to what His messenger announces. Al-Māturīdī therefore relates them to the mission as well as to resurrection and tawḥīd; their relevance to all three does not establish that the opening concerns the mission alone. The full argument from power, wisdom, gratitude and joined provision is developed in 78:6–7, Q2.[44]
5. Could the expression include all these truths?
Since the signs answer several connected claims of the mission, must we choose only one of them? A broader interpretation understands “the great news” as the whole class of momentous announcements brought by the Messenger ﷺ: the Qurʾān is Allah’s speech, worship of other gods is false, and the dead will be raised. A particular explanation such as “resurrection” could then identify one member of that class without excluding the others.
Ibn ʿĀshūr adopts this construction. It also affects how he understands the following proof. He reads the signs of verses 6–16 as showing clearly that the news includes the announcement that Allah is One, and also as proving that bodies can be raised. The broader interpretation thus treats the passage as confronting the hearers with connected truths of the prophetic message.[45]
That inclusive explanation can encompass the whole revealed law, including tawḥīd, resurrection and recompense, as Ibn Juzayy explains. It can also place particular emphasis within that whole: al-Biqāʿī gathers the mission, Book and Day together while foregrounding resurrection, and Ibn ʿUthaymīn includes all the clear proofs and guidance, especially the Hereafter. In each case, identifying one central announcement need not exclude the others.
But inclusion and non-selection are different judgments. To say that the expression embraces the whole message is an affirmative explanation. Al-Māturīdī instead leaves its exact subject undecided because the alternatives fit and adequate knowledge for an exclusive judgment is lacking. A third judgment accepts that the truths imply one another while still asking which is most directly intended. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim reports al-Ṭabarī as preferring to include all the explanations and agrees that their subjects are connected. He then asks: ولكن السياق في النبأ وهو مفرد. فما المراد به هنا بالذات؟, “But the context concerns the news, which is singular. What, specifically, is meant by it here?” His answer is resurrection, for the contextual reasons already developed.[46] The broader explanation is therefore intelligible, but the connection among the truths does not erase the reason for preferring resurrection as this passage’s immediate subject.
Comparison of positions.
| Judgment | What it does and does not claim |
|---|---|
| The expression includes the message’s connected announcements. | The mission, revelation, tawḥīd and resurrection belong together. This is an affirmative comprehensive interpretation, developed in different ways by Ibn Juzayy, Ibn ʿĀshūr and others. Recognizing the connection need not entail that preference: ʿAṭiyyah Sālim affirms their mutual implication but still prefers resurrection here.[47] |
| One exclusive subject has not been established. | Several questions fit the words and evidence, so al-Māturīdī declines a categorical choice without adequate knowledge. Withholding an exclusive verdict is different from affirming that the expression itself comprehends all the subjects.[48] |
6. Other interpretations and spiritual comparisons
These alternatives all concern truths announced by the Messenger ﷺ. An identification outside that group must still answer to the warning, signs and appointed Day. A spiritual comparison raises a different question: does it replace the bodily resurrection explained by the passage, or illustrate a related inward experience?
An identification with ʿAlī. Al-Nīsābūrī reports that "the Shīʿah" took the great news to be ʿAlī رضي الله عنه. The surrounding verses refuse the idea. The opening moves immediately into a severe warning, the vast signs of creation, and the Day of Decision, realities that clearly concern the raising of the dead, not a portrait of a man. Al-Nīsābūrī himself explains the news as the resurrection.[49]
A spiritual comparison. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī offers a different kind of extension. After explaining bodily resurrection, he signals a spiritual analogy: the heart revives after the ego’s death, and an experience unknown to the ego is denied while the spirit acknowledges it. The comparison rests on the fundamental distinction between hearing of a reality and directly tasting it. He associates it with poetry attributed to Kamāl Khujandī. A corresponding text in the poet’s collected poetry reads:
زاهد چه عجب گر کند از عشق تو پرهیز کس لذت این باده چه داند که نخوردست“What wonder if the ascetic avoids love of you? How can anyone know the delight of this wine without having drunk it?”
The wine represents an experience that cannot be known from outside. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī uses the poem to illustrate his spiritual comparison, while explaining the verse itself as bodily resurrection.[50]
The distinction is between identifying the subject of the verse and drawing an analogy from its meaning. The personal identification competes with the passage’s account of resurrection and must answer its contextual evidence. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī’s spiritual comparison, by contrast, leaves bodily resurrection as his literal explanation; it illustrates inward revival without replacing the announced event.[51]
Conclusion
“The great news” most directly means resurrection and the coming Judgment. The warning, proof and appointed Day give the contextual reason for that preference, adopted by al-Rāzī, Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī and others.
Several commentators report that most took the "news" to be the Qurʾān. This remains a possible meaning, and a complementary one for scholars who held both: the Qurʾān is the "announcement" itself, and Resurrection is the part of it proven most directly by the verses that follow.
And Allah knows best.
Q4. What does their disagreement consist of?
﴿ٱلَّذِى هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ ٣﴾“That over which they are in disagreement.” (78:3, Saheeh International).[1]
If the opening concerns people who reject resurrection, why does it describe them as differing? Shared rejection need not mean complete agreement. We will first distinguish affirmation, denial and doubt, then examine differences among the opponents themselves, including their conflicting accusations. The warning will help us decide whether believers also belong to this group. Finally, we will examine the proposal that “differing” means opposition to the Prophet ﷺ, and what the sentence emphasizes about the dispute.
1. What different responses does the verse describe?
The simplest contrast is between affirmation and denial. Death is before their eyes; resurrection is announced to them. Acknowledging what they witness does not settle whether they accept what they are told will follow it.[2] Qatādah explains their disagreement in these terms: all acknowledge death, but some affirm resurrection and others deny it.[3]
On this explanation, the two sides differ over the further claim that the dead will be raised. Al-Ṭabarī likewise explains the verse through people who affirm the news and people who reject it.[4] This gives a clear account of disagreement across the wider audience. Whether that wider audience is intended throughout these five verses depends upon the rebuke that follows.
Before examining that rebuke, we need to distinguish a third response: doubt. The person who is unsure has reached neither settled faith nor a settled assertion that resurrection is impossible.[5] Disagreement can therefore concern certainty as well as affirmation and denial. Ibn ʿUthaymīn explicitly distinguishes all three responses.[6]
2. How can opponents differ among themselves?
That third response matters even if the people in view are all opponents. Uncertainty leaves the question unsettled; a firm denial claims to have settled it negatively. The hesitation described in 41:50, where a person doubts that the Hour will occur but still imagines returning to his Lord, differs from the categorical denial of being raised in 23:37. Both people resist the announcement, but they do not express the same conviction (al-Rāzī).[7] Al-Ālūsī prefers this contrast between deniers and doubters.[8]
Nor does every partial affirmation amount to accepting the announced resurrection. A person may affirm a spiritual return while denying that bodies will be raised. Another may accept an afterlife but reject Muḥammad ﷺ as its truthful announcer. “Opponents” can thus describe people who refuse different parts of the message, not only people who refuse every part alike. Al-Rāzī includes these distinctions in his answer.[9]
Even saying “there will be a return” leaves a further question: what does the person expect to happen there? Trusting idols to intercede is different from accepting the Messenger’s warning. So is the expectation in 41:50 of receiving good if returned to one’s Lord, despite doubting the Hour. Such confidence preserves an expectation of safety while resisting the judgment being announced.[10] The disagreement may concern accountability and imagined protection from it, not only whether a future life exists (al-Nasafī in al-Taysīr, Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī).[11]
What if they all deny resurrection? Their reasons can still differ:
- Someone who denies a Creator acting by choice rejects the agent who would restore the dead.
- Someone else may allow divine agency but claim that bringing back what has ceased to exist is intrinsically impossible.
The second objection does not begin by denying power; it claims that the proposed act falls outside what is possible, and therefore outside what power can bring about. The first argument concerns the agent, the second the nature of the act. Their shared negative conclusion does not make the two arguments identical. Thus disagreement remains possible even on the assumption that all deny resurrection: they may disagree about why they deny it. Al-Rāzī gives this as a second answer, distinct from differences in what they affirm or deny.[12]
3. What do their competing accusations tell us?
Different reasons for denial are not the only differences among the opponents. Their accusations also disagree. Calling revelation magic, poetry, divination, madness or tales of earlier peoples gives conflicting explanations of what has confronted them. The labels serve a common rejection, but their accounts of the revelation are not identical. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah includes these accusations in his Quraysh-focused explanation; Ibn ʿĀshūr joins them to differing degrees of denial.[13]
This explains why the accounts of their disagreement differ with the proposed meaning of “the news.” Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wasīṭ connects it with accusations against the Qurʾān; Ibn Kathīr connects it with affirmation and denial of resurrection. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wajīz also explains the news as resurrection.[14] Q3 examines those arguments about the news itself. Here their contribution is narrower: disagreement may appear in conflicting accusations as well as in opposing answers.
The explanation must consequently keep the news and the kind of disagreement connected. If the news is the Qurʾān, competing claims of poetry, magic and divination give different accounts of the same revelation. If it is resurrection, affirmation, doubt and denial divide the responses to a future event. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wasīṭ uses the conflicting accusations to support the Qurʾān interpretation; his al-Wajīz instead explains the news as resurrection and the disagreement through their failure to believe. The accounts should not be merged merely because they share an author.[15]
4. Does the verse include believers too?
We can now return to the wider contrast considered first: believers affirming against unbelievers denying. That explanation makes disagreement straightforward, but does it fit the whole passage? On the wider account, the exchange includes believers, deniers and people who introduce misleading suggestions.[16] On the narrower Quraysh account, uncertainty, denial and conflicting accusations explain the disagreement within the opponents themselves. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah distinguishes these alternatives.[17]
A wider audience is also possible if the people asking are distinguished from the people answering. The questioners may be opponents, while “they” in verse 3 includes both sides of their exchange. Affirming respondents and denying questioners can disagree without every questioner being a believer. Al-Māturīdī allows this explanation; al-Ālūsī records it among the weaker alternatives and prefers deniers contrasted with doubters.[18]
The objection concerns the warning. If believers and deniers are both included in “they ask” and “they differ,” the later “they will know” must narrow the audience to deniers: believers do not deserve this rebuke for affirming resurrection. The wider account therefore changes whom “they” includes as the passage proceeds.
Keeping the opponents in view throughout avoids that change. Their questioning, disagreement and rejection lead directly to the warning addressed to them. This is the continuity objection raised by Abū al-Suʿūd against including believers.[19]
The objection also explains why an initially possible account may ultimately be rejected. Al-Shawkānī first considers believers and deniers as an answer to the difficulty about disagreement. At kallā, however, he rejects including believers: the rebuke and threat concern unbelievers. Ibn Kamāl likewise objects that exempting believers from the warning requires a distinction not established by the wider construction. The account must explain the rebuke, not only make “disagreement” easy to understand.[20]
The reply distinguishes an exchange from the conduct condemned within it. Believers may ask for clarity and increased certainty, while deniers ask mockingly. On that explanation, the same exchange contains different intentions; kallā rebukes its denial, and the threatened knowledge concerns the deniers. Al-Maẓharī develops this answer. Al-Kūrānī includes believers and unbelievers under the pronoun, describes the disagreement through denial and doubt, and directs the rebuke at the mocking questioners.[21]
Quṭb similarly distinguishes a disagreement involving believers and deniers from the opening’s challenge to the deniers.[22] These wider explanations can account for both sides without blaming believers for belief. Nevertheless, the narrower explanation gives the more direct sequence here: the people who question the news are described as differing and then warned. Differences among deniers and doubters already explain verse 3, so including believers is not necessary to resolve the difficulty. This is why we favour keeping the opponents in view throughout.[23]
5. Could “differing” mean opposition to the Prophet ﷺ?
Keeping the opponents in view still leaves one further proposal to examine: perhaps “differing” describes their common opposition to the Prophet ﷺ rather than their disagreement with one another. Several people can perform an action without exchanging it among themselves. If that is the sense here, the verse describes their departure from what the Messenger tells them, not divisions within their own group.
Abū al-Suʿūd’s argument has two steps:
- The questioning need not be reciprocal. As explained in Q2, يَتَسَاءَلُونَ can describe several people asking the Prophet ﷺ, rather than asking one another. Abū al-Suʿūd explicitly refers back to that explanation here.
- The related word formation can allow the same possibility. “Differing” is formed on the Arabic pattern called iftiʿāl, whereas “questioning” uses the related pattern called tafāʿul. He compares الاستباق والتسابق (istibāq and tasābuq), competing in a race, and الانتضال والتناضل (intiḍāl and tanāḍul), competing in archery. His point is that related formations can share a use. If the questioning can be directed by several people toward the Prophet ﷺ, he argues, the differing can likewise mean their opposition to him.
The grammatical argument thus permits him to explain “differing” as several people opposing the Messenger ﷺ. It does not depend on making believers one side of the disagreement (Abū al-Suʿūd).[24]
His second reason concerns the ground of blame. Suppose two camps both hold false positions. Neither deserves punishment merely for rejecting the other camp’s falsehood. What deserves rebuke is their opposition to the truth brought by the Prophet ﷺ. He therefore takes that opposition as the intended difference and connects kallā with their questioning and rejection of the Messenger’s announcement.[25]
The moral reason is clear, but it does not require “differing” itself to mean opposition to the Messenger. Deniers and doubters can disagree with one another while both reject his announcement; the warning can condemn that rejection without condemning each merely for disagreeing with the other. The ordinary sense of disagreement within the group therefore remains intelligible. Al-Ālūsī objects that Abū al-Suʿūd’s explanation departs from the apparent wording and finds its reasoning problematic; he prefers deniers contrasted with doubters.[26] We retain that more immediate sense here.
The alternative therefore turns on whom their opposition concerns. Abū al-Suʿūd takes it as opposition to the Prophet ﷺ, drawing on forms that do not require an action exchanged within a group. Al-Ālūsī’s objection brings the inquiry back to this sentence: a grammatically possible use does not by itself make it the apparent meaning here. That is why the ordinary sense of disagreement among the opponents remains important to the choice.[27]
6. What does the wording emphasize?
Once disagreement within the group is understood, the sentence’s emphasis becomes clearer. The clause هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ names the people first, هُمْ, “they”, and then describes them as مُخْتَلِفُونَ, “differing.” It presents disagreement as their established condition, not merely one argument that occurred. Their different responses persist around the same great news (Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī, Ibn ʿĀshūr).[28]
Emphasizing “they” strengthens the description; it need not mean that no other people have ever differed. Al-Nīsābūrī makes that distinction explicitly. The explanation reported by al-Ṭībī singles out Quraysh’s persistence in this dispute, rather than claiming that disagreement has never existed elsewhere. Placing فِيهِ, “concerning it,” before مُخْتَلِفُونَ also draws attention to the subject that occupies them and preserves the verse ending (Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī).[29] The wording therefore presents continuing disagreement over this announcement, which the following warning confronts.
Conclusion
Shared opposition does not require identical conviction. Deniers and doubters can disagree among themselves while remaining the people whom the passage questions and warns; this explains verse 3 without changing the audience or the ordinary sense of “differing.” And Allah knows best.
Q5. What does kallā reject or affirm?
﴿كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٤﴾“No! They are going to know.” (78:4, Saheeh International).[1]
The difficulty is that kallā can be explained as a rebuke, “No!”, or as an affirmation, “Truly.” The first rejects their denial; the second affirms the declaration that they will know. Rejecting a denial also affirms the truth denied, but it does so by answering their false claim. This is the movement Ibn ʿĀshūr finds here: their denial is rejected, the event’s occurrence is affirmed, and the warning adds that they will know it and face the consequence of rejection.[2]
We will first identify what the rebuke rejects, then compare the affirmative alternative. Finally, we will compare the two warnings and explain why the scholars differ about pausing at kallā.
1. What is being rebuked?
What, then, is rejected? If the news is resurrection, kallā rejects their denial of resurrection. If it is the Qurʾān, it rejects their denial of revelation. Al-Qurṭubī distinguishes these constructions.[3] The act of questioning can itself be rebuked when it is used for mockery, as al-Zamakhsharī explains.[4]
Both explanations give the word something definite to answer. Al-Qaffāl describes its more apparent function in Arabic as لِرَدِّ شَيْءٍ قَدْ تَقَدَّمَ, “to reject something that has preceded.” Here the rejected claim is that the great news is false or that the announced event will not happen. The declaration “they will know” then answers that denial with a warning (quoted by al-Rāzī).[5]
Rejecting their claim must be distinguished from denying that people actually disagree. Al-Wāḥidī calls kallā a negation of their disagreement: the matter admits no disagreement. In al-Wasīṭ, “the matter is not as they said” makes the rejection of their claim clear. A different explanation, reported by Makkī from Nuṣayr, takes it as “no disagreement in the Qurʾān”; Abū Ḥātim does not allow that explanation.[6] The first answers the opponents’ false judgment. The second makes an assertion about the revelation’s freedom from disagreement. They are different explanations of what the negation concerns.
The backward connection raises a further question: does kallā rebuke only their questioning, or also their disagreement? On Abū al-Suʿūd’s account in Q4, “differing” means their opposition to the Prophet ﷺ. Both the questioning and that opposition resist the truth, so he makes both the object of rebuke.[7]
The objection concerns how the sentence is built. الَّذِي هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ, “concerning which they differ,” describes the news; it does not introduce a separate statement about their conduct. Treating the disagreement as a second, independently stated act to rebuke is therefore less direct than answering the questioning itself. Al-Ālūsī records this objection to the wider explanation and takes kallā directly as a rebuke of the questioning.[8] This gives the word a clear connection to the passage without requiring the relative clause to make a separate assertion.
2. Could it introduce an affirmation instead?
Answering the denial is not the only proposed connection. Kallā can instead introduce what follows: ḥaqqan, “truly,” affirms the declaration, while introductory alā calls attention to it.[9] In explanatory English, the contrast is between “No! They will know,” “Truly, they will know,” and a call to attend to the declaration. The first looks back to reject the questioners’ claim; the other two look forward to the warning. Al-Qurṭubī records these alternatives; al-Suyūṭī attributes “truly” to al-Kisāʾī and introductory alā to Abū Ḥātim.[10]
Pausing makes that distinction audible. On the rebuking explanation, “No!” can complete the rejection of what precedes. On the affirmative or introductory explanation, kallā needs the declaration that follows to complete its function. Al-Qurṭubī therefore permits a stop upon it when it rebukes, and permits beginning with it when it means ḥaqqan or alā.[11] These are the results of his interpretation of the connection; the other stopping authorities’ judgments will be compared below.
The repetition can therefore renew a rebuke or move from rebuke to affirmation. Treating both occurrences as rebuking renews the rejection (Dār al-Ṣaḥābah).[12] Treating the first as rebuke and the second as ḥaqqan, “truly,” introduces the renewed warning as an affirmation (Aysar al-tafāsīr, explanatory notes).[13] Maʿāriful Qurʾān illustrates the affirmative and negative explanations differently: its English verses use “Truly,” while the commentary explains “never” or “by no means.” A translation and its commentary cannot therefore be treated as making an identical grammatical claim.[14] Both explanations affirm the announced truth, but one does so directly and the other by rejecting its denial.
3. Must kallā always have the same meaning?
Ibn Hishām objects to making rebuke the meaning of kallā everywhere: some passages state no denial to reject, and assuming one merely to preserve a universal rule can be strained. That objection does not prevent rebuke here. The opponents’ questioning and denial give the word a stated target, so its meaning in al-Nabaʾ does not depend on proving that it has only one function throughout the Qurʾān.[15]
4. Why do stopping rules differ between the two verses?
A stopping judgment considers which words belong together. In verse 4, kallā precedes “they will know.” In verse 5 it has thumma, “then,” before it as well. Beginning at the second kallā would leave “then” behind, while stopping upon it would separate it from “they will know.”
Makkī’s fourfold classification, transmitted by al-Suyūṭī, follows these connections. It distinguishes places where one may stop and begin at kallā; stop but not begin; neither stop nor begin; or begin but not stop. He places verse 4 in the last group: one may begin at kallā, but stopping upon it is “not good.” He places verse 5 in the third group: neither beginning nor stopping at the word is “good,” because it connects with what precedes and what follows.
Al-Qurṭubī’s different judgment on verse 4 follows his rebuking explanation: “No!” can complete the rejection, so he permits stopping upon it. Al-Zarkashī does not permit that stop; Thaʿlab permits no stop on kallā anywhere in the Qurʾān. Thus the answer to “May one stop here?” depends on which authority’s judgment is being stated. The rebuking meaning permits the stop in al-Qurṭubī’s account; it does not establish agreement among the stopping authorities.[16]
These rules concern starting or stopping at the word kallā, not whether one may pause at a verse ending. They follow Makkī’s particular explanation of the connections, rather than imposing one rule wherever the same word occurs.
Conclusion
Here kallā answers denial with rebuke. The opponents’ questioning provides its target, and “they will know” makes the rejection a warning rather than a bare correction; this gives the clearest connection between the dispute and its answer. And Allah knows best.
Q6. What will they come to know?
﴿كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٤﴾“No! They are going to know.” (78:4, Saheeh International).
The sentence does not finish with “the answer,” “resurrection,” or “their punishment.” It stops at “they will know.” What they now dispute will become something they encounter. That is why these words warn them: the announced Day will not remain a subject they can dismiss in conversation.[1]
Three questions help us follow the explanation: What will they know? Why leave it unstated? How does that future knowledge differ from the evidence already available to them?
1. What will they know?
Knowing that the news is true and experiencing its consequences are related, but not identical. A person may discover that a warning was true: what was mocked becomes a witnessed event, and the Messenger’s announcement is vindicated.[2] He may also suffer the harm of which he was warned. The second experience includes a consequence that the first description, taken by itself, does not express.
The rebuke makes this distinction important. If the explanation were only “they will discover that resurrection happens,” it would state a future discovery but leave its fearful consequence unexpressed. A threat concerns what will happen to the people being warned, not simply the solution to their question.[3] Abū al-Suʿūd therefore understands what awaits them as فنون الدواهي والعقوبات, “the calamities and punishments.” Their experience of those consequences will answer the questioning they now treat dismissively.[4]
Al-Ālūsī adopts the same explanation: they will encounter calamities and punishments.[5] He also accepts “the recompense of their questioning” as an equivalent expression. He then reports another explanation without adopting it: they will discover that the event is real and feel shame before their Lord for having mocked it. On that view, the discovery becomes a threat because of the shame it brings, not simply because an unanswered question is settled.[6]
The punishment account explains the threat, but truth and punishment need not be separated. The event will prove their denial false, and its judgment will bring them to account. Leaving the object of “know” unstated allows both to belong to what they discover. This is Ibn ʿĀshūr’s interpretation.[7] Al-Ṭabarī likewise joins what Allah does with them to their recognition of their former error: they learn the truth through what happens to them.[8]
Al-Qāsimī, drawing on al-ʿInāyah, instead offers truth or punishment as alternative objects of knowledge; this is not the same judgment as Ibn ʿĀshūr’s explicit combination of the two.[9]
The warning has so far been explained through resistance to the truth. What if a person asks because he has a real difficulty, rather than because he has decided to reject the answer? Reflection on Allah’s blessings, governance and power may answer his difficulty and lead him to understand resurrection. On al-Māturīdī’s interpretation, “they will know” can promise that understanding.
He then contrasts the person who neglects those signs and refuses to consider them fairly. That person learns through the consequence of denial. The difference is therefore not between asking and never asking. It is between inquiry that attends to the evidence and resistance that refuses it.[10]
Al-Ālūsī records a different proposal: the questioners will know their reward if they desist. He objects that a threat is what these words immediately convey here. His objection concerns that reward proposal; it is not a reply to al-Māturīdī’s separate argument about sincere inquiry. Al-Darrah also sees an implied good promise to believers alongside the threat to deniers. The immediate warning remains directed at rejection, while these explanations ask what may be understood about those who turn toward the truth.[11]
2. Why does the verse leave the object of knowledge unstated?
The explanation should not narrow what the verse leaves open. “They will know the truth of resurrection” names the discovery; “they will experience their punishment” names the consequence. Saheeh International’s “They are going to know” leaves both unexpressed, as the Arabic does. The interpretation developed above can therefore include truth and consequence without inserting either into the translation. The possible constructions are explained in Iʿrāb, §5, and the force of withholding the outcome under “The discussion is interrupted”.
3. If evidence already exists, why say that they will know later?
The warning leaves its outcome unexpressed, but places knowledge of it in the future. That raises a further question: the people already have reasons to believe, so what will they know later? Evidence and direct experience are different ways of knowing. Allah’s creation demonstrates the possibility of resurrection, and His announcement promises its occurrence. Seeing it happen is a further experience.
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim develops this distinction from the sūrah’s sequence. The signs that follow show creative power and make resurrection intelligible. Yet سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “they will know,” still points ahead. The knowledge that remains future is direct witnessing.
The difference becomes explicit in al-Takāthur 102:1–7: its warning leads from knowledge of certainty to seeing Hell with عَيْنَ الْيَقِينِ, “the eye of certainty.” In al-Nabaʾ, the signs lead to the announced Day of Decision in verse 17. The event demonstrated by the signs will then be encountered. This is ʿAṭiyyah Sālim’s argument, quoted by Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn; Ibn ʿUthaymīn likewise explains the certainty of witnessing on Judgment.[12]
This changes the denier’s position. An argument can be resisted; the event itself cannot be dismissed once it is witnessed. Al-Biqāʿī contrasts willing submission now with being brought low by that encounter. The same distinction explains how someone can have sufficient evidence for belief and still face a future disclosure: the wonders of creation already demonstrate the Creator’s power to revive the dead (Ibn Juzayy), while death brings a person into the reality he disputed (Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ). Muḥammad ʿAbduh understands the announced encounter as the Hour.[13]
Al-Māturīdī offers a related interpretation of the two verses: verse 4 refers to علم دلالة, “knowledge through evidence,” and verse 5 to علم المشاهدة والعيان, “knowledge through witnessing and direct sight.” That is one proposed explanation of the repetition. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim’s argument establishes the broader difference between present evidence and future witnessing without dividing the two verses in that way. Q7 examines the proposed allocation.[14]
If knowing means direct experience, must it wait for the final rising? A deceased person can be shown what awaits him before the gathering begins. Ibn ʿĀshūr supports this account with the report that a person’s future place is shown after death. It explains how recognition of the truth and of punishment can begin before the final Resurrection.
The report from Ibn ʿUmar in Ṣaḥīḥ al-Bukhārī includes:
إِنَّ أَحَدَكُمْ إِذَا مَاتَ عُرِضَ عَلَيْهِ مَقْعَدُهُ بِالْغَدَاةِ وَالْعَشِيِّ“When one of you dies, his place is shown to him morning and evening.”
It then distinguishes the place of a person destined for Paradise from that of a person destined for the Fire, and concludes:
هَذَا مَقْعَدُكَ حَتَّى يَبْعَثَكَ اللَّهُ يَوْمَ الْقِيَامَةِ“This is your place until Allah raises you on the Day of Resurrection.”[15]
Ibn ʿĀshūr quotes an abbreviated formulation about the unbeliever and calls that report authentic. He also cites a different report, which al-Albānī grades very weak:
الْقَبْرُ رَوْضَةٌ مِنْ رِيَاضِ الْجَنَّةِ أَوْ حُفْرَةٌ مِنْ حُفَرِ النَّارِ“The grave is a garden from the gardens of Paradise, or a pit from the pits of Hell.”[16]
The soul’s experience after burial connects the two kinds of knowing. The person who refused the announcement now encounters what he denied. Ibn ʿĀshūr relates this to the seeing described in al-Takāthur 102:6–7: the discovery is through sight, not merely through hearing a report. His argument explains knowledge after death; it does not divide the two reports between verses 4 and 5.[17]
Whether the discussion concerns witnessing, punishment or the recognition reached through reflection, the verb looks ahead. Its prefix سَـ (sa-) makes the knowing future. In this warning it also conveys nearness and certainty: the deniers must not treat what awaits them as safely remote (Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī, Ibn ʿĀshūr).
That does not yield a number of days or years. The Arabic authorities dispute whether سَـ necessarily indicates a nearer future than سَوْفَ (sawfa). Ibn Mālik objects to making that a fixed distinction; al-Zarkashī answers partly from the special force of threatening speech. A warning does more than locate an event in the future: it brings the encounter before the hearer as something to fear now. The secure conclusion here is certainty of the encounter, not a timetable derived from the prefix.[18]
Conclusion
Their discovery of the truth will also confront them with the consequence of denying it (Ibn ʿĀshūr). This is what makes “they will know” a warning: the answer will concern their own fate, not merely the correctness of an opinion. The next Question examines why that warning is spoken twice. And Allah knows best.
Q7. Why is the warning repeated, and what does thumma add?
﴿كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٤﴾“No! They are going to know.” (78:4)﴿ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ٥﴾“Then, no! They are going to know.” (78:5, Saheeh International).[1]
The warning returns in the same words, with one addition: ثُمَّ (thumma), “then.” Repetition can make a warning firmer; “then” can raise its force or place a second experience after the first. The question is whether these verses renew one warning or announce two different encounters.[2]
That difference matters at several levels. Are the same people warned twice, or does the audience change? Do they discover different things, learn in different ways, or know at different times? The grammatical connection, the repeated كَلَّا, “No!”, and the parallel in al-Takāthur help distinguish these explanations. Each must account for the whole warning, not merely for “then.”
1. What does a renewed warning accomplish?
The deniers’ confidence rests on the belief that the announced encounter will never happen. The first warning confronts that confidence: they will know. The second does not give their denial room to stand. When they meet Allah and face their deeds, what they denied will be before them. Both statements address the same deniers, and the renewed threat confirms the first.[3] Al-Ṭabarī develops this explanation, and al-Wāḥidī prefers it over the two-audience account.[4]
The repeated sentence already makes the warning firm. Thumma adds a rise in degree: the second warning is more severe than the first.[5] The event is not only certain; it is graver than the hearers imagine. Al-Zamakhsharī and Ibn ʿĀshūr draw out this force. Certainty that something will occur and recognition of how momentous it will be are related, but they are not the same thought.[6]
Why say the warning again rather than add a new fact? Human inclinations recur; a warning heard once can be forgotten when desire returns. Admonition may therefore need to return too. Al-Zarkashī explicitly includes these verses among his examples: renewed warning gives the meaning a firmer place in the mind. Repetition is not empty merely because it does not name another event. He also allows different kinds of knowing in other contexts, especially al-Takāthur; that comparison is examined below.[7]
The warning’s force also depends on what remains unsaid. “They will know” does not yet describe everything they will face. Their present questioning will receive an answer through encounter, not further dispute. Quṭb develops the gravity of this unspecified answer; Mawdūdī, Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ and Muḥammad ʿAbduh explain the movement from present disagreement to unavoidable knowledge. The withheld object allows the warning to encompass the encounter and its consequences without dividing them between the two verses.[8]
2. Is this emphasis in meaning or in grammatical construction?
Calling the second warning a conjoined sentence does not make it less emphatic in meaning. Ibn ʿUthaymīn affirms that it strengthens the first while denying the technical label of grammatical emphasis; he illustrates the promised knowing through direct witnessing on Judgment in 7:53.[9] The distinction is explained in Iʿrāb, §6, and the increase in force under “A stronger repeated warning”.
The remaining interpretive question is whether the second sentence warns the same people more strongly or concerns another audience or experience. Al-Maydānī distinguishes renewed warning from repeated wording whose object, time, place or recipients have changed. His examples of Qurʾānic refrains show that context can give unchanged words a fresh application. Grammar permits both explanations but does not choose between them; the following sections test whether this passage indicates such a change.[10]
3. Could the warnings address different audiences?
A change of audience would make the two statements concern contrasting outcomes. Al-Ṭabarī records an interpretation ascribed to al-Ḍaḥḥāk through a disputed route.[11] In this account, verse 4 concerns unbelievers discovering the punishment for denial; verse 5 concerns believers discovering the reward for faith.[12] The second statement would then be a promise to believers rather than another threat to the same deniers.
The reverse order places believers first and unbelievers second. It gives thumma an increase in severity: the threat to deniers follows the promise to believers. For either allocation to work, the preceding discussion must be broad enough to include both groups. Al-Qurṭubī records the reverse order without naming its proponent; al-Ālūsī explains how it could fit that broader audience, but questions it.[13]
The difficulty is continuity. The passage has been rebuking those who question in rejection. If the second warning turns to believers, the explanation must account for a change that the sentence does not explicitly announce. Keeping both warnings directed to the deniers avoids that change. Al-Samʿānī likewise describes the same-unbeliever audience as the apparent meaning. Al-Wāḥidī prefers the repeated threat because repetition confirms the warning.[14]
The repeated كَلَّا makes this difficulty sharper: the second statement also begins with rebuke. That is why al-Shawkānī, after recording both allocations, rejects including believers under the rebuke and threat.[15]
The pronouns provide a further test. سَيَعْلَمُونَ means “they will know”; سَتَعْلَمُونَ means “you will know.” The ten readings retain “they” in both verses, continuing the third-person reference in verse 3. Direct address in both verses need not create a new audience either: Ibn ʿAṭiyyah understands the Prophet ﷺ as instructed to repeat the warning to those present, and regards other explanations of that form as strained.
A mixed third-person-then-address form has been interpreted as threat to deniers followed by promise to believers. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah reports that explanation anonymously. It is a different sequence from the address-then-third-person form that Abū Ḥayyān attributes to al-Ḍaḥḥāk:
| Verse 4 form | Verse 5 form | Interpretation and attribution | Reader and status |
|---|---|---|---|
| سَيَعْلَمُونَ: “they will know” | سَيَعْلَمُونَ: “they will know” | Ibn ʿAṭiyyah finds repeated rebuke the apparent meaning. | The ten readings: yāʾ in both. |
| سَتَعْلَمُونَ: “you will know” | سَتَعْلَمُونَ: “you will know” | Ibn ʿAṭiyyah understands the Prophet ﷺ as instructed to repeat the warning to those present; he finds other explanations strained. | Reported from Ibn ʿĀmir through Ibn Dhakwān in Ibn Mujāhid’s account, against Hishām’s yāʾ; also reported from al-Ḥasan, Abū al-ʿĀliyah, Mālik b. Dīnār and Ibn Miqsam. Not adopted in the ten. |
| سَيَعْلَمُونَ: “they will know” | سَتَعْلَمُونَ: “you will know” | Ibn ʿAṭiyyah records an unnamed explanation: threat to deniers, then promise to believers. | An unnamed report in Ibn ʿAṭiyyah. Not adopted in the ten. |
| سَتَعْلَمُونَ: “you will know” | سَيَعْلَمُونَ: “they will know” | Abū Ḥayyān attributes this different order to al-Ḍaḥḥāk. | Reported from al-Ḍaḥḥāk. Not adopted in the ten. |
That third-person-then-address sequence must not be confused with the address-then-third-person sequence that Abū Ḥayyān records from al-Ḍaḥḥāk.[16]
These tāʾ forms are not adopted in the ten; al-Nashr records no difference among its routes here, as explained in the Qirāʾāt section. They help explain how particular commentators understood an audience change, but do not require one in the established yāʾ wording. The continuity of the pronouns and of the rebuke favours keeping both warnings directed to the deniers.
The two-audience proposal must pass two tests at once: a change of recipients must fit the pronouns, and a promise to believers must fit the repeated rebuke. Keeping both warnings directed at deniers avoids both difficulties. The historical attributions also differ: al-Nasafī assigns the reverse order to al-Ḍaḥḥāk, but Māhir Adīb Ḥabbūsh and Jamāl ʿAbd al-Raḥīm al-Fāris correct it from al-Ṭabarī’s deniers-then-believers report. Neither the reversed attribution nor the different reported pronoun sequences should be collapsed into a single account.[17]
4. Could the same people come to know different things?
The second warning could add a further discovery without changing the people warned. Gathering for reckoning would make them face their deeds; punishment would bring the consequence of that reckoning.[18] Discovering that punishment is real could be followed by discovering that it will never end, removing the hope of eventual relief.[19] Other explanations distinguish what Allah does with them on Judgment from their recognition that their former belief was false, or move from resurrection to punishment in Hell; one account distinguishes torment at resurrection from torment in Hell.[20] A further discovery need not even require another date: learning the believers’ condition after their own could compound bodily suffering with humiliation (alternatives discussed by al-Rāzī, al-Nasafī, al-Māwardī, Ibn Fūrak and al-Ālūsī).[21]
Because the object of “know” is unexpressed, these consequences can belong to the renewed warning without the wording selecting one pair and assigning a discovery to each verse.
5. What changes when knowledge becomes direct experience?
There is a further distinction: a person may know a truth through evidence, then witness it directly. Here the object need not change at all. Al-Māturīdī allows verse 4 to promise علم دلالة, knowledge through evidence, and verse 5 علم المشاهدة والعيان, knowledge through witnessing and direct sight. The later encounter would confirm by experience what the evidence had demonstrated.[22]
The distinction is between what is known and how it becomes known. Abū al-Suʿūd emphasizes the punishment they encounter; al-Ālūsī also considers their shame at recognizing the truth they mocked. Those explanations identify the object of knowledge. Al-Māturīdī’s proposal instead identifies two ways of knowing that object: demonstration, then sight.[23]
The sūrah does move from evidence to future encounter: the signs demonstrate resurrection, while its witnessing lies ahead on the Day of Decision. But that movement need not divide these two warnings. In ʿAṭiyyah Sālim’s explanation, both point toward future experience; the demonstrations follow them. Q6 develops his distinction between knowing through proof and knowing through sight.[24]
Nor does a change from denial to sincere inquiry, by itself, explain the repetition. Al-Māturīdī conditionally allows a promise of understanding for genuine inquiry, and al-Ālūsī records a reward proposal. Those possibilities concern whether knowing is promised or threatened, as Q6, section 5 explains. They do not assign a distinct function to each of the two statements.[25]
Because neither verse names a method of knowing and both point to the future, the distinction between evidence and sight does not require dividing the two warnings.[26]
6. Do the warnings refer to two different times?
If thumma marks a temporal interval, the later encounter may also be more severe: the distress and disclosure at death can be followed by the punishment encountered at Resurrection.[27] Worldly punishment, with Badr as one example, followed by punishment in the Hereafter gives a different sequence.[28] Knowing in the grave and knowing after resurrection are also distinct occasions; the latter need not be merely a repetition of the former.[29] Another proposal distinguishes resurrection from recompense.[30] Knowledge before death followed by knowledge after it joins a change of time to a change in submission: a person who resisted the evidence can no longer resist direct encounter (alternatives discussed by al-Ālūsī, al-Rāzī, al-Jazāʾirī, al-Maẓharī, Ibn Kamāl and al-Biqāʿī).[31]
“Then” permits succession but does not name its events, so none of these particular pairings is a timetable established by the repeated warning alone.[32]
7. What does repeating kallā add?
The temporal explanation must also account for the repeated كَلَّا, not only the promised knowing. Each verse contains a complete rebuke-and-warning: كَلَّا, “No!”, followed by سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “they are going to know.” The straightforward construction joins these whole warnings. Al-Ālūsī takes that as the apparent sense, whether the second follows the first in severity or in time.
Joining only the two knowing clauses creates a further difficulty: the second kallā stands between the words being connected. A proposed answer distinguishes time from severity. Both rebuke and warning can become more forceful, allowing the second kallā to share in the increase. A temporal interval, however, belongs to the future knowing rather than to the particle of rebuke. The discussion then proposes that the first rebuke rejects questioning and the second rejects explicit denial. Al-Ālūsī questions this more elaborate account. Joining the complete warnings already explains the placement of both particles, without requiring two separate targets of rebuke.[33]
Distinguishing the rebukes would give the second verse a further target: first restraint from disagreement, then restraint from disbelief, as al-Nīsābūrī reports. But disagreement and disbelief already belong to the response being rebuked. The renewed-warning explanation does not leave either unanswered. Al-Nīsābūrī also transmits the explanation of the scholars of meanings: repeating rebuke together with warning expresses the utmost severity. This accounts for the whole repeated sentence, not just its verb.[34]
8. What can the comparison with al-Takāthur establish?
The complete-warning construction leaves both heightened force and successive fulfilments possible. Could another sūrah help decide between them? Al-Takāthur has a closely related rebuke-and-warning, addressed directly to its hearers:
﴿كَلَّا سَوْفَ تَعْلَمُونَ ٣﴾“No! You are going to know.” (102:3)﴿ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَوْفَ تَعْلَمُونَ ٤﴾“Then no! You are going to know.” (102:4, Saheeh International).
The repetition raises the same question: does it reinforce one warning, or distinguish two experiences? Ibn al-Qayyim records the reinforcement explanation, with al-Nabaʾ as a parallel. For al-Takāthur, however, he prefers knowledge at death followed by knowledge in the grave.[35]
The reasons for that preference explain why the context matters. A coherent new meaning is preferable, he reasons, when the language permits it without loss of eloquence. The intervening thumma points to distance in time and gravity. The experiences themselves then make that distance intelligible: at death, a person recognizes the truth of the condition in which he lived; in the grave and afterward, further disclosure brings a certainty beyond that first recognition. The second warning can therefore refer to more than the repetition of what was already known.
He also invokes a weak athar attributed to ʿAlī رضي الله عنه:
مَا زِلْنَا نَشُكُّ فِي عَذَابِ الْقَبْرِ حَتَّى نَزَلَتْ: أَلْهَاكُمُ التَّكَاثُرُ“We continued to doubt punishment in the grave until Sūrat al-Takāthur was revealed.”[36]
The athar connects al-Takāthur with punishment in the grave, but its chain is weak. Al-Tirmidhī calls it gharīb, and al-Albānī grades its chain weak. Al-Ḥajjāj b. Arṭāt narrates it without explicitly confirming that he heard it from his teacher. It therefore does not establish this explanation as an authenticated statement of ʿAlī.
The final reason comes from the later words of al-Takāthur:
﴿لَتَرَوُنَّ الْجَحِيمَ ٦﴾“You will surely see the Hellfire.” (102:6)﴿ثُمَّ لَتَرَوُنَّهَا عَيْنَ الْيَقِينِ ٧﴾“Then you will surely see it with the eye of certainty.” (102:7, Saheeh International).
Verse 6 says that they will see Hell. Verse 7 repeats the seeing, joins it with “then,” and adds عَيْنَ الْيَقِينِ, “the eye of certainty.” Ibn al-Qayyim reasons from both additions: the later seeing follows the earlier and is described with a further degree of certainty. This supports his argument for successive experiences in al-Takāthur.[37]
The comparison makes successive disclosures possible, but its weak athar and the later descriptions in al-Takāthur do not establish death and the grave as the two encounters intended in al-Nabaʾ.[38]
Conclusion
The most connected explanation is a renewed, more forceful warning to the same deniers. It preserves the pronouns and the rebuke, while giving thumma the rise in severity explained above. Different experiences may fulfil that warning, but its repetition does not require a different audience, object or way of knowing for the second statement. And Allah knows best.
2. Iʿrāb: Grammatical Analysis
The opening moves from a question to its answer, then from the people’s disagreement to a warning. The word and clause tables use Dār al-Ṣaḥābah’s Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm as their baseline, with wording also informed by al-Ṣāfī. The labels explain the analysis; they are not verbatim quotations from a single work. The alternatives below explain where other constructions change that movement.[1]
Word / Grammar / What it does
| Word | Grammar | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 78:1:1 عَمَّ ʿamma |
عَنْ: حرف جر؛ مَا: اسم استفهام في محل جر ʿan: ḥarf jarr; mā: ism istifhām fī maḥall jarr. A preposition followed by an interrogative noun. Mā is مبني على السكون المقدر, mabnī ʿalā al-sukūn al-muqaddar: its fixed ending is understood on the deleted alif. |
“About what?” The phrase attaches to “they ask.” The two elements appear together as one written word. |
| 78:1:2 يَتَسَآءَلُونَ yatasāʾalūn |
فعل مضارع مرفوع بثبوت النون، والواو فاعل fiʿl muḍāriʿ marfūʿ bi-thubūt al-nūn; al-wāw fāʿil. A present/future verb whose rafʿ is marked by retaining the nūn; the wāw is its plural subject. |
“They ask one another.” The subject is plural and third person. The possible direction of their questioning is examined under Ṣarf below. |
| 78:2:1 عَنِ ʿani |
حرف جر ḥarf jarr, a preposition. |
“About.” In the baseline construction, it begins the answer and attaches to a second, understood “they ask.” |
| 78:2:2 ٱلنَّبَإِ al-nabaʾi |
اسم مجرور بعن ism majrūr bi-ʿan. A noun governed by ʿan, with kasrah marking jarr. |
Identifies what they ask about: “the news.” |
| 78:2:3 ٱلْعَظِيمِ al-ʿaẓīmi |
نعت مجرور naʿt majrūr. An adjective agreeing with the noun in jarr. |
Describes the news as “great.” |
| 78:3:1 ٱلَّذِى alladhī |
اسم موصول في محل جر نعت ثان للنبإ ism mawṣūl fī maḥall jarr, naʿt thān li-l-nabaʾ. A relative noun functioning as a second description of the news. |
“Concerning which.” It opens a further description of the same news. |
| 78:3:2 هُمْ hum |
مبتدأ mubtadaʾ, the subject of a nominal sentence. |
“They.” The sentence now describes the people’s response. |
| 78:3:3 فِيهِ fīhi |
جار ومجرور متعلق بالخبر jārr wa-majrūr mutaʿalliq bi-l-khabar. Fī governs the pronoun hi; the phrase attaches to “differing.” |
“About it.” The pronoun refers to the news and identifies the matter over which they differ. |
| 78:3:4 مُخْتَلِفُونَ mukhtalifūn |
خبر مرفوع بالواو khabar marfūʿ bi-l-wāw. The predicate is a sound masculine plural, with wāw marking rafʿ. |
“Differing.” Unlike the wāw in the two verbs above and below, this wāw is a noun’s case sign, not a subject pronoun. |
| 78:4:1 كَلَّا kallā |
حرف ردع وزجر ḥarf radʿ wa-zajr, a particle of restraint and rebuke. |
Rejects the response just described and demands that it cease. |
| 78:4:2 سَيَعْلَمُونَ sayaʿlamūn |
السين للاستقبال؛ يعلمون مضارع مرفوع بثبوت النون، والواو فاعل al-sīn li-l-istiqbāl; yaʿlamūn muḍāriʿ marfūʿ bi-thubūt al-nūn; al-wāw fāʿil. Sīn marks futurity; the verb retains its nūn, and wāw is its subject. |
“They will know.” The first warning looks beyond their present disagreement. |
| 78:5:1 ثُمَّ thumma |
حرف عطف ḥarf ʿaṭf, a conjunction. |
Joins the second warning to the first. What kind of progression it expresses is a further question of meaning. |
| 78:5:2 كَلَّا kallā |
حرف ردع وزجر ḥarf radʿ wa-zajr, a particle of restraint and rebuke. |
Renews the rebuke before the repeated warning. |
| 78:5:3 سَيَعْلَمُونَ sayaʿlamūn |
السين للاستقبال؛ يعلمون مضارع مرفوع بثبوت النون، والواو فاعل al-sīn li-l-istiqbāl; yaʿlamūn muḍāriʿ marfūʿ bi-thubūt al-nūn; al-wāw fāʿil. The same future construction occurs again. |
“They will know.” This occurrence belongs to the warning joined by thumma. |
Clause / Position
In verse 2, the brackets below identify the verb understood in the grammatical explanation; they are not additional Qurʾānic words.[2]
| Clause | Position |
|---|---|
| عَمَّ يَتَسَاءَلُونَ “About what are they asking?” |
جملة ابتدائية, jumla ibtidāʾiyya: the opening sentence. It does not depend on a preceding sentence for its grammatical position. |
| [يَتَسَاءَلُونَ] عَنِ النَّبَإِ الْعَظِيمِ “[They ask] about the great news.” |
جملة استئنافية, jumla istiʾnāfiyya: a new explanatory sentence answering the opening question. |
| هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ “They differ about it.” |
صلة الموصول, ṣilat al-mawṣūl: the clause completing alladhī, “which.” The clause itself has no independent case position. |
| كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ “No indeed! They will know.” |
جملة استئنافية, jumla istiʾnāfiyya: a new sentence rebuking them and declaring what will follow. |
| ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ “Then, no indeed! They will know.” |
معطوفة على الجملة السابقة, maʿṭūfa ʿalā al-jumla al-sābiqa: joined to the preceding warning sentence. |
Where the grammar changes the meaning
1. How does “about what?” become ʿamma?
Two different changes produce عَمَّ (ʿamma) from عَنْ مَا (ʿan mā).
- The interrogative loses its alif. When a preposition governs interrogative مَا, “what?”, its final alif is normally deleted. The fatḥah remains as a sign of that vowel. This distinguishes the interrogative from relative mā, “that which,” which retains its alif. Makkī emphasizes the distinction; Abū al-Suʿūd also records lightness and frequent use as an explanation.
- The nūn merges into the mīm. This is إدغام (idghām), assimilation. Al-Zajjāj explains it through the nasal resonance, غُنَّة (ghunnah), shared by the two consonants. The doubled mīm and the deleted alif therefore have different explanations.[3]
Why does this phrase come first? Interrogative mā takes the beginning of its question, and its preposition cannot be separated from it. They move together to the front. Ibn ʿĀshūr also explains the written joining: once the alif is removed, only the mīm of mā remains; the spelling joins it to the preceding preposition and reflects the assimilated pronunciation.[4]
Arabic poetry makes the deletion rule visible. Al-Ṣāfī cites al-Kumayt b. Zayd:
فتلك ولاة السوء قد طال مكثهم … فحتام حتام العناء المطوّل“Those evil rulers have stayed so long. Until when, until when, will this prolonged suffering last?”
The important word is حَتَّامَ (ḥattāma), “until when?” The preposition حَتَّى is followed by interrogative mā, whose alif has been removed.[5]
A contrasting witness retains the alif:
على ما قامَ يَشْتِمُني لَئيمٌ … كخِنْزيرٍ تَمَرَّغَ في رَمادِ“For what reason has a vile man begun insulting me, like a pig rolling in ashes?”
Here عَلَى مَا (ʿalā mā), “for what?”, keeps the long vowel. Al-Ṣāfī treats this as poetic necessity, not a model for ordinary usage. Al-Samīn allows poetic necessity or rare prose usage. Their explanations qualify the rule without changing the familiar form عَمَّ in this passage.[6]
Not all linguistic authorities restrict retaining the alif to poetic necessity. Al-Farrāʾ says وَإِنْ أَتْمَمْتَهَا فَصَوَابٌ, “If you give it its full form, that too is correct.” He gives the following witness, recited to him by al-Mufaḍḍal:
إنا قتلنا بقتلانا سَراتكم … أهلَ اللِّوَاءِ ففِيما يكثر الْقِيلُ“We killed your chiefs, your standard-bearers, for our slain; so about what is all this talk?”
The interrogative فَفِيمَا (fa-fīmā), “so about what?”, keeps the alif after فِي, “about.” Al-Harawī, quoted by al-Zarkashī, likewise identifies retention as a dialectal usage. Alif deletion remains the form in عَمَّ here; the disagreement concerns how broadly the retained form is allowed in Arabic.[7]
The restriction matters: it concerns interrogative mā governed by a preposition. It does not remove every alif from every use of mā. Nor does it apply to the internal alif of مَاذَا (mādhā), as in لِمَاذَا (limādhā), “why?”[8]
2. How does “about the great news” join the question?
The two phrases begin with the same preposition: عَمَّ, “about what?”, and عَنِ النَّبَإِ, “about the news.” The grammatical question is which verb governs each phrase.[9]
| Construction | Grammatical connection | Effect in English |
|---|---|---|
| Question, then answer | The first phrase attaches to the pronounced يَتَسَاءَلُونَ. A second verb is understood with عَنِ النَّبَإِ. This is the Dār al-Ṣaḥābah baseline and al-Samīn’s preferred first attachment. | “About what are they asking? [They are asking] about the great news.” The second verse answers the first. |
| Substitution, بدل (badal) | The second prepositional phrase replaces or clarifies the first, with the preposition repeated. Al-Kharrāṭ gives this construction. Makkī in Mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān and al-ʿUkbarī give it as their first analysis; Makkī’s al-Hidāyah begins with the understood answering verb. | The great news still identifies the matter in question. The construction may be represented by the same question-and-explanation punctuation; it does not by itself name a different subject. |
| An understood verb first, the pronounced verb second | عَمَّ depends on an understood verb. The pronounced يَتَسَاءَلُونَ then governs عَنِ النَّبَإِ. Al-Samīn records this alternative and al-Zamakhsharī’s explanation involving a stop after ʿammah. | “About what [are they asking]? They ask about the great news.” The sentence boundary falls earlier, after the opening interrogative. |
| A question about why they ask | عَنِ النَّبَإِ attaches to the pronounced verb, while the first question challenges their asking. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah attributes this to most grammarians; al-Rāzī identifies it as al-Farrāʾ’s and the Kūfans’ choice. Makkī compares it with the answering construction. | “Why are they asking about the great news?” This challenges their reason for asking rather than first asking what the subject is. |
The first and second constructions can leave the ordinary English wording much the same while explaining its connection differently. The “why” construction changes the question itself.[10]
The construction also affects where the thought can be paused. In Makkī’s explanation, the answering construction allows a stop at the end of verse 1: the question is complete before its answer. On the linked “why” construction, “about the great news” completes the same question, so he does not allow that stop. This is a consequence of his grammatical analysis.[11]
Al-Farrāʾ also gives this answering construction, explaining the opening as a question put to the Prophet ﷺ: عَمَّ يَتَسَاءَلُونَ يَا مُحَمَّدُ؟, “About what are they asking, O Muḥammad?” The answer then identifies their subject: “[They ask] about the great news.” He compares the question and answer in al-Mursalāt 77:12–13: the question directs attention to the appointed Day, then the answer names it.[12]
On the renewed-question construction, the second verse in effect asks, “Are they asking about the great news?” Al-Maẓharī explains two possible forces of that renewal: further magnification, or disapproval of asking about the great news at all, because its truth is clear and calls for belief. An answer names the subject; a renewed question challenges their response to it. The English therefore changes with the construction.[13]
Substitution raises another difficulty. The two expressions are عَمَّ, “about what?”, and عَنِ النَّبَإِ الْعَظِيمِ, “about the great news.” If the second replaces the first, why does it not repeat the first phrase’s interrogative force? Al-Bāqūlī raises this objection. Understanding an answering verb avoids it: the second phrase then answers the question instead of replacing it.
There is also an objection about what is replaced. “About what?” opens the possibilities: is the subject the great news or something else? “About the great news” names only one of them. The author of al-Kashf, quoted by al-Ālūsī, therefore objects to treating that identification as a substitute for the whole question. Al-Khafājī defends substitution: this is not a literal request for information whose interrogative force must be reproduced, and substitution may concern part of an expression rather than all of it.
Abū al-Suʿūd places the understood answering verb after “about the great news,” so that the identifying words come first; al-Ālūsī reports his reason.[14] Q2, §2 weighs these constructions, and “Expectation followed by clarification” explains their effect.
3. Does الَّذِي (alladhī, “which”) continue the description or begin a new statement?
The baseline takes الَّذِي (alladhī), “which,” as a second description of النَّبَإِ, “the news,” after “great.” Dār al-Ṣaḥābah also gives two ways of making the description more independent.[15]
| Construction | Understood relationship | What changes |
|---|---|---|
| نعت في محل جر naʿt fī maḥall jarr, an adjective in the jarr position |
“The great news concerning which they differ.” | The relative clause continues the description of the news directly. |
| خبر في محل رفع khabar fī maḥall rafʿ, a predicate in the rafʿ position |
هُوَ الَّذِي, “It is that concerning which they differ.” | An understood “it is” gives the description a separate assertion. |
| مفعول به في محل نصب mafʿūl bihi fī maḥall naṣb, an object in the naṣb position |
أَعْنِي الَّذِي, “I mean that concerning which they differ.” | An understood “I mean” singles out the description for explanation. |
These are alternative grammatical positions for the same fixed form alladhī, not three different pronunciations. The news remains the referent on all three. English may bring out the difference through punctuation or an explanatory phrase, but a natural translation can retain “concerning which they differ” throughout.
Within the relative clause, هُمْ (hum), “they,” is the subject; مُخْتَلِفُونَ (mukhtalifūn), “differing,” is its predicate. The intervening فِيهِ (fīhi), “about it,” attaches to that predicate. Its early position keeps the news in view before their response is named. The interpretations of that emphasis are examined in Q4.
4. Rebuke, affirmation and the verb that follows
On the baseline analysis, كَلَّا (kallā) rebukes and restrains. It does not change the grammatical mood of يَعْلَمُونَ (yaʿlamūn): the nūn remains, and the verb is marfūʿ. The prefixed سَـ (sa-) directs the knowing toward the future.[16]
The alternative explanations of kallā change the opening force of the sentence. As rebuke, it means “No indeed!”; as أَلَا (alā), it draws attention, “Indeed!” or “Take notice!”; as حَقًّا (ḥaqqan), it affirms, “Truly.” Q5 explains the choice in this passage; the note below gives the wider usage evidence.[17]
5. What is left unexpressed after سَيَعْلَمُونَ (sayaʿlamūn, “they will know”)?
Arabic distinguishes knowing an object from knowing a judgment about it. Al-Rāghib gives the first construction one مفعول به (mafʿūl bihi), an object, and the second two. A simple grammatical illustration shows the difference:[18]
| Illustration | Object or objects | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| عَلِمْتُ زَيْدًا | زَيْدًا, Zaydan, is the one object. | “I knew Zayd”: recognition of a person. |
| عَلِمْتُ زَيْدًا صَادِقًا | زَيْدًا is the first object; صَادِقًا, ṣādiqan, “truthful,” is the second. Together they express the judgment about Zayd. | “I knew Zayd to be truthful.” |
The verse leaves what they will know unexpressed. Al-Darwīsh understands “what will befall them” as its object. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah instead explains the verb through recognition itself, without positing a particular object. The difference is between completing “they will know…” with an understood outcome and taking it as “they will come to recognize.”[19]
Thus neither one object nor two should be inserted into a translation as though Arabic grammar had settled the interpretation. “They will know” preserves the warning’s open expression. A fuller explanation must identify whose interpretation it follows.[20] Q6 weighs truth and punishment; “The discussion is interrupted” explains the force of leaving the outcome unnamed.
6. Is the repeated warning verbal emphasis or a coordinated clause?
The first warning is كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “No! They are going to know” (78:4). The second is ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “Then, no! They are going to know” (78:5).
Emphasis describes the effect of repeating the warning; coordination describes how the two sentences are joined. A جملة معطوفة (jumlah maʿṭūfah), a coordinated clause, is joined to another clause by a conjunction. Here ثُمَّ (thumma, “then”) joins the second warning to the first. Dār al-Ṣaḥābah and al-Ṣāfī describe this relationship as coordination.[21]
Can it also be called التوكيد اللفظي (tawkīd lafẓī), formal verbal repetition for emphasis? The objection is the intervening conjunction: grammarians quoted by al-Samīn call the construction coordination while acknowledging its emphatic effect. Jamāl al-Dīn Ibn Mālik allows the technical label despite that conjunction.[22]
The two identical sentences can nevertheless differ in force. Al-Darwīsh explains that the second warning is more severe, so the conjunction joins statements with different degrees of threat. He calls the second clause تأكيد لفظي, verbal emphasis, without treating “then” as pointless. Ibn ʿĀshūr also uses the emphatic classification; Ibn ʿUthaymīn instead denies technical tawkīd while affirming reinforcement in meaning. Ibn ʿĀdil preserves the grammatical disagreement.[23]
Badr al-Dīn b. Mālik allows an emphatic sentence to be joined by a conjunction; al-Zarkashī rejects limiting that allowance to thumma on the basis of wording used by Badr al-Dīn’s father, Jamāl al-Dīn Ibn Mālik.
An intervening expression does not by itself settle which earlier clause a conjunction joins. Al-Zarkashī’s examples and his answer to the objection are given in the note.[24]
The technical labels need not change the translated wording, “Then, no! They are going to know.” Q7, §2 distinguishes this grammatical question from the interpretation of the repeated warning; “A stronger repeated warning” explains its increasing force.
3. Ṣarf: Roots and Morphology
The forms below describe questioning, news, greatness, disagreement and future knowledge. سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “they will know,” occurs twice, with the same form in each warning.[1]
The six occurrences
| Occurrence and root | Form and pattern | Inflection and contribution |
|---|---|---|
| 78:1:2 يَتَسَآءَلُونَ yatasāʾalūn س أ ل, s-ʾ-l |
Form VI, تَفَاعَلَ (tafāʿala). The plural present/future pattern is يَتَفَاعَلُونَ (yatafāʿalūn). Base: تَسَاءَلَ يَتَسَاءَلُ, tasāʾala yatasāʾalu. | Third-person masculine plural, active; rafʿ by retaining the nūn, wāw the subject. It ordinarily expresses people asking one another; the alternatives are developed below. |
| 78:2:2 ٱلنَّبَإِ al-nabaʾi ن ب أ, n-b-ʾ |
Singular noun نَبَأ on فَعَل (faʿal); plural أَنْبَاء (anbāʾ). The definite article is added to the noun. | Majrūr after ʿan. The final hamzah is the third root letter, whatever its written seat. The article’s lām assimilates to nūn in pronunciation. The noun names the news about which they ask. |
| 78:2:3 ٱلْعَظِيمِ al-ʿaẓīmi ع ظ م, ʿ-ẓ-m |
Singular masculine adjective on فَعِيل (faʿīl), from عَظُمَ يَعْظُمُ, ʿaẓuma yaʿẓumu. | Majrūr in agreement with al-nabaʾ. Its article’s lām is pronounced. Greatness describes the news’s importance, not a physical dimension or a comparative degree such as “greater.” |
| 78:3:4 مُخْتَلِفُونَ mukhtalifūn خ ل ف, kh-l-f |
اسم فاعل (ism fāʿil), an active participle of Form VIII اِخْتَلَفَ (ikhtalafa). Singular مُخْتَلِف on مُفْتَعِل (muftaʿil); plural on مُفْتَعِلُونَ (muftaʿilūn). | The predicate of hum, marfūʿ by the wāw of the sound masculine plural. It describes them as differing about the news. It does not itself say how long their disagreement lasts. |
| 78:4:2 سَيَعْلَمُونَ sayaʿlamūn ع ل م, ʿ-l-m |
سَـ plus Form I يَعْلَمُونَ on يَفْعَلُونَ (yafʿalūn); base عَلِمَ يَعْلَمُ, ʿalima yaʿlamu. | Active third-person masculine plural, marfūʿ by retaining nūn, wāw the subject. Future sīn is outside the root. This first occurrence declares forthcoming knowledge in answer to present disagreement. |
| 78:5:3 سَيَعْلَمُونَ sayaʿlamūn ع ل م, ʿ-l-m |
A second occurrence of the same future-prefixed Form I verb, on يَفْعَلُونَ (yafʿalūn). | The same inflection and plural subject. Its sentence is now joined by thumma, renewing the warning. Any difference in the experience intended must come from the sentence’s meaning, not from a changed verb form. |
What the forms and roots contribute
1. Asking one another, asking someone else, and asking repeatedly
The ordinary Form VI sense involves participation: one person asks another, who can in turn ask the first. Ibn Manẓūr records this reciprocal use. Al-Rāghib’s distinction between requests for knowledge and requests for property clarifies the kind of asking here: the preposition عَنْ (ʿan), “about,” introduces the subject of an information question.[2]
But does Form VI require the questioners to ask only one another? The linguistic argument has several steps.
Several people may act toward someone outside their group. Compare تَرَاءَى الْقَوْمُ, “the people saw one another,” with تَرَاءَوُا الْهِلَالَ, “they looked for the crescent.” The second expression still has several people acting, but the crescent does not look back at them. Abū al-Suʿūd uses this distinction to explain how the people may ask the Messenger ﷺ or believers, with the person questioned left understood. Mutual participation is an ordinary use of the form, not a requirement imposed on every occurrence.[3]
Even a reciprocal action may have a further object. In تَفَاوَضَا الْحَدِيثَ, “the two exchanged conversation,” the participants act with one another, while الْحَدِيثَ, “conversation,” names what they exchange. Al-Ālūsī reports this explanation from “some verifying scholars,” who illustrate it with poetry of Imruʾ al-Qays:
فلما تنازعنا الحديث وأسمحت … هصرت بغصن ذي شماريخ ميال“When we exchanged conversation and she yielded willingly, I drew toward me a branch with swaying clusters.”
The branch is the poet’s image for the woman. The grammatical evidence is الْحَدِيثَ, the expressed object, distinct from the two participants. Reciprocity and an object can coexist. This answers the claim that Form VI must always be intransitive.[4]
The form need not always have several agents. The examples تَوَانَى زَيْدٌ, “Zayd was slack,” and تَدَانَى الْأَمْرُ, “the matter drew near,” each have a single subject. Al-Qāsimī and the Academy’s al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ use them against a universal plurality rule.
Abū al-Suʿūd also explains that one person may question several things. He cites al-Najm 53:55:
﴿فَبِأَيِّ ءَالَآءِ رَبِّكَ تَتَمَارَىٰ﴾“Then which of the favors of your Lord do you doubt?” (Saheeh International)
تَتَمَارَىٰ (tatamārā), “you doubt,” addresses one person; ءَالَآءِ (ālāʾ), “favors,” is plural. The multiplicity lies in the matters questioned, not in several people questioning each other. In 78:1 the people are plainly plural, but Form VI alone does not settle whom they ask.[5]
Repeated or forceful asking is another possibility. Ibn ʿĀshūr allows mutual questioning, repetition and force in the act. In explaining the range of related questioning forms, he quotes al-Nābighah:
أُسَائِلُ عَنْ سُعْدَى وَقَدْ مَرَّ بَعْدَنَا … عَلَى عَرَصَاتِ الدَّارِ سَبْعٌ كَوَامِلُ“I keep asking about Suʿdā, though since our departure seven full years have passed over the dwelling’s grounds.”
He also quotes Ruwayshid b. Kathīr al-Ṭāʾī:
يَا أَيُّهَا الرَّاكِبُ الْمُزْجِي مَطِيَّتَهُ … سَائِلْ بَنِي أَسَدٍ مَا هَذِهِ الصَّوْتُ“O rider urging on his mount, ask Banū Asad what this cry is.”
The expressions أُسَائِلُ and سَائِلْ are Form III, not the Form VI word in the verse. Ibn ʿĀshūr brings these related questioning usages into his explanation of repeated asking. In the first, he understands أُسَائِلُ as continued inquiry. In the second, سَائِلْ is a command to one rider to ask Banū Asad; the poetry itself does not tell us how often he asks. The witnesses show the usages on which Ibn ʿĀshūr draws, rather than establishing that every Form VI verb expresses repetition.
For intensity, he gives the related Form III expression عَافَاكَ اللَّهُ, “May Allah grant you well-being,” describing its force as قُوَّةُ صُدُورِ الْفِعْلِ, strength in the act’s expression. He offers it as a comparison, not as an instance of two parties acting upon each other.[6]
Ibn ʿĀshūr then allows the literal sense and an accompanying implied or figurative sense together. People may genuinely exchange questions while the manner of their questions expresses repeated insistence or mockery. Others may still be asking from uncertainty. His conclusion therefore does not force every questioner into one inward state. The form describes the asking; context establishes its purpose.[7]
2. News and greatness
نَبَأ (nabaʾ) is a noun on faʿal, while عَظِيم (ʿaẓīm) is an adjective on faʿīl. The patterns do not, by themselves, identify the news as resurrection, the Qurʾān or prophethood. That decision requires the contextual arguments developed in Q3.
The two words also do different work. The noun names the announcement; the adjective directs attention to its gravity. Even where nabaʾ is understood as consequential news, “great” is not empty repetition. Ibn ʿĀshūr explains the transfer from bodily magnitude to importance: a powerful meaning occupies the mind as a large visible thing fills the view. The adjective heightens the news’s importance.[8]
The linguistic authorities explain the root connection with عَظْم (ʿaẓm), “bone,” in different directions. Q3 compares al-Rāghib’s bone-first account with Ibn Fāris’s account from strength. Jabal gives two possibilities: the bone supports the flesh and so produces bulk, or its hardness resists reduction under pressure. Both lead to nonphysical greatness in rank or effect; neither requires imagining the news as a large body.[9]
For the different explanations of nabaʾ as weighty information, news arriving from elsewhere, or something disclosed after being hidden, see Q3 §1.
3. How does “differing” relate to its root?
The participle مُخْتَلِفُونَ describes people whose responses do not agree. The linguistic authorities explain that relationship through different images, not one compulsory root derivation.[10]
| Explanation | How it accounts for disagreement |
|---|---|
| Different paths: al-Rāghib, followed in related discussion by al-Samīn | Each takes a path in speech or conduct different from the other’s. Difference is broader than complete opposition: two things can differ without being opposites. Differences in speech can then develop into contention. |
| One statement replacing another: Ibn Fāris | Among this root’s meanings is one thing following or replacing another. People who differ put aside one another’s statements and put their own in their place. He connects disagreement with this replacement meaning, not simply with “behind.” |
| Turning toward what the other leaves: Jabal | He relates the root to remaining after something or being behind it. In disagreement, each figuratively goes toward the position the other has left. His explanation includes the participle used here. |
These accounts explain why ikhtilāf can describe unlike judgments. They do not identify the people or decide how far apart their judgments are. Denial versus doubt, different accusations, and belief versus denial require the evidence examined in Q4. Nor does the active participle alone establish that their disagreement is permanent.
4. Knowing: from a distinguishing sign to recognition
The root ع ل م joins knowledge with signs by which something becomes recognizable. Ibn Fāris describes a distinguishing mark and includes a flag or a mountain used as a landmark. His witness from al-Khansāʾ makes the image concrete:
وإنَّ صخراً لتَأتمُّ الهُداةُ به … كأنَّه علمٌ فى رأسه نارُ“The guides themselves follow Ṣakhr, as though he were a landmark with fire on its summit.”
A prominent landmark gives direction even to guides. Ibn Fāris relates knowledge, the opposite of ignorance, to this family of distinguishing signs.[11]
Jabal develops the relationship further. A desert landmark is not merely a pile of stones. In his explanation, it has several connected features:
- Strong material: accumulated stones make a substantial structure.
- A recognizable purpose: its height, arrangement and position show that it was erected to indicate a road, direction or boundary.
- Durability: a traveller needs the sign to remain; rebuilding it continually in the wilderness would defeat its purpose.
- Accurate indication: a strong, lasting sign is useful only when it directs the traveller correctly.
He connects these features with the definition of knowledge as a firm, stable judgment corresponding to reality. Evidence forms a judgment in the heart; its strength supports firmness, its stability supports settled knowledge, and its accurate indication supports correspondence with what is real. This is Jabal’s explanation of the root relationship, rather than a claim that every firmly held belief is knowledge.[12]
The distinction between recognition and judgment then becomes important. Al-Rāghib and Ibn Manẓūr distinguish recognizing something from knowing a proposition about it, as the grammar discussion above explains. Jabal approvingly quotes Abū Ḥayyān’s further distinction: مَعْرِفَة (maʿrifah) concerns individual objects and follows ignorance, whereas عِلْم (ʿilm) concerns relationships and need not follow ignorance. On this distinction, maʿrifah means coming to recognize what was previously unknown. Allah’s knowledge is not preceded by ignorance; hence, as Abū Ḥayyān explains, Allah is described with ʿilm, not maʿrifah.[13]
For the people addressed here, the future verb declares that knowledge will succeed their present disagreement. Both occurrences use the same Form I verb. The second warning’s greater force comes from its repetition and connection with thumma, not from a new root, a different pattern or a stronger conjugation.
4. Balāghah: Rhetorical Analysis
The opening first draws attention to the news, then confronts the response to it. Its movement is deliberate: a question awakens expectation; the answer names a momentous subject; the description exposes disagreement; and a repeated warning declares that disagreement will give way to knowledge. The following discussions explain how the wording produces that movement. The “plain way” comparisons are explanatory English, not alternative Qurʾānic wording.
An opening that anticipates the sūrah (براعة الاستهلال, barāʿat al-istihlāl)
Where it is: عَمَّ يَتَسَاءَلُونَ, “About what are they asking one another?”
The plain way: A statement such as “They are asking about resurrection” would immediately identify both the questioners’ activity and its subject.
What it does: The question withholds the subject long enough to make the listener attend to it. Allah is not seeking information. The people’s questioning is itself brought before the hearer as something that needs examining: what matter has occupied them, and how are they responding to it? Ibn ʿĀshūr describes the movement as تشويق ثم تهويل (tashwīq thumma tahwīl): arousing interest, then making the gravity of the matter felt. Once the answer identifies “the great news,” the listener cannot treat the opening as an incidental report of a conversation.[1]
The effect: The opening prepares the reader for the sūrah’s subject before explaining it. Ibn ʿĀshūr therefore identifies barāʿat al-istihlāl, an opening that anticipates what the discourse will develop. The coming judgment is not first presented as a distant item of information. The hearer is made attentive to its magnitude and to the human response it demands. Q2 develops the distinct explanations of the question: magnification, wonder and rebuke.[2]
Expectation followed by clarification
Where it is: عَمَّ يَتَسَاءَلُونَ عَنِ النَّبَإِ الْعَظِيمِ: the question is followed by “About the great news.”
The plain way: The subject could be named within a single statement, without an interval of questioning.
What it does: On the question-and-answer construction, the same speaker asks and answers. Why create a question only to answer it at once? The first sentence creates an expectation that the second satisfies: the answer reaches a mind already seeking it and therefore settles more firmly. This is the firmer understanding Ibn ʿĀshūr explains, and the eloquence for which Ibn Juzayy prefers the construction. Al-Rāzī’s answer to the same objection is أقرب إلى التفهيم والإيضاح, “nearer to making it understood and clear.” The sequence has taught the hearer how to attend, not merely conveyed a fact. The complete poetic witness from Ḥassān b. Thābit, with its question and answer, appears in Q2.[3]
The effect: The listener first encounters something important enough to be asked about, then learns what it is. A renewed question instead magnifies the news further or challenges the hearers’ response to it. These are different ways of directing attention, not interchangeable labels; Iʿrāb, §2 gives the constructions, and Q2, §2 explains the preference for an answer.
Greatness set against disagreement
Where it is: النَّبَإِ الْعَظِيمِ الَّذِي هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ, “the great news … That over which they are in disagreement.”
The plain way: “The news about which they disagree” would identify the subject without explicitly describing its greatness.
What it does: الْعَظِيمِ, “great,” establishes the importance of the news before the people’s disagreement is mentioned. Ibn ʿĀshūr explains the familiar transfer from bodily magnitude to magnitude of consequence: something need not be physically large to be momentous. The relative clause then brings their response into view. Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī explain that this further description increases the weight given to the subject. The news is not made great by their agreement, nor made small by their denial.[4]
The effect: Two unequal things stand together: the magnitude of what is announced and the unsettled responses of its hearers. The warning that follows resolves the tension. They may dispute it now, but they will come to know. This contrast does not settle which groups are included in “they”; Q4 develops the competing explanations and the reasons for preferring denial and doubt among the opponents.
A settled pattern of disagreement: the nominal clause and fronting (التقديم, taqdīm)
Where it is: هُمْ فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ, literally, “they, concerning it, are differing.”
The plain way: “They differ about it” would state the action directly, placing the subject of the disagreement after the verb in ordinary English.
What it does: The Arabic uses a nominal clause: هُمْ, “they,” followed by its predicate مُخْتَلِفُونَ, “differing.” Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī explain this as presenting disagreement as an established condition. The phrase فِيهِ, “concerning it,” is placed before the predicate, drawing attention to the very news at issue while also preserving the verse-ending pattern. The force lies in the combination: this momentous news is the object around which their disagreement persists.[5]
The effect: The verse portrays more than an isolated question that happened once. It exposes a continuing response to the announcement. Fronting gives prominence to the subject of dispute; it does not require the claim that these people disagree about nothing else. Nor does the nominal form by itself identify their beliefs. Those conclusions still depend on the context and the explanations examined in Q4.
The discussion is interrupted, but the consequence is not yet named
Where it is: كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “No! They are going to know.”
The plain way: A longer explanatory statement could reject their denial and immediately name everything they will discover or suffer.
What it does: On the rebuke interpretation, كَلَّا stops the preceding attitude sharply. The passage no longer describes people questioning one another; it answers their dismissal. Because the new statement responds directly to what precedes, it needs no joining word: this is Ibn ʿĀshūr’s explanation of the break.[6]
The object of “know” then remains unstated. Naming one consequence would narrow the hearer’s attention to it. Instead, the short declaration directs attention toward the proof and scenes of Judgment that follow, before the full seriousness of the encounter is unfolded. Its brevity leaves room for truth and its consequences; leaving the outcome undescribed also gives the threat greater gravity.[7]
The effect: The warning gives certainty before giving detail. The hearer knows that present disagreement will not prevent future knowledge, while the unexplained consequence makes the warning more arresting. Q5 examines the alternatives to rebuke; Iʿrāb, §5 gives the constructions, and Q6 explains what the warning includes.
The force of كَلَّا also belongs to its Qurʾānic setting. Al-Zarkashī observes that its occurrences are confined to the second half of the muṣḥaf, much of which was revealed in Makkah. He connects its recurring threat and rebuke with confronting Makkah’s arrogant opponents. Poetry he quotes from ʿAbd al-ʿAzīz al-Dīrīnī expresses that distribution:
وَمَا نَزَلَتْ كَلَّا بِيَثْرِبَ فَاعْلَمَنْ وَلَمْ تَأْتِ فِي الْقُرْآنِ فِي نِصْفِهِ الْأَعْلَى“Know that kallā was not revealed in Yathrib, nor does it occur in the Qurʾān’s first half.”
Within this opening, the rebuke accordingly confronts resistance to the great news, before the warning declares that its opponents will know.[8]
The future made urgent: سَـ and سَوْفَ
Where it is: Both occurrences of سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “they will know.”
The plain way: “At some future time they will know” could state futurity while leaving the event comfortably remote from the hearer’s present concerns.
What it does: The prefix سَـ (sa-) places the knowing in the future. Within this warning, Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī and Ibn ʿĀshūr also explain nearness and certainty. The event is not offered as a possibility to be weighed against their denial. It is announced as what awaits them.[9]
Does سَـ always mean a nearer future than سَوْفَ (sawfa)? Al-Zarkashī holds that it does, agreeing here with al-Zamakhsharī, Ibn al-Khashshāb, Ibn Yaʿīsh and Ibn Bābashādh. Ibn Mālik objects that future time, like past time, need not be divided into near and distant by its grammatical marker. He compares the warnings with sa- in al-Nabaʾ and sawfa in al-Takāthur, and the two promises below: different markers can concern the same future. Al-Zarkashī answers that the promised benefits have not first been shown to be one event. Allah promises good in this life and the next, so the statements could concern different benefits. He also excludes the warnings from the comparison: threatening speech is not a neutral prediction, such as saying that someone will stand. In a threat, sa- intensifies the warning and brings its fulfilment near. This explains the warning’s force without deriving a numerical timetable from the prefix.[10]
| Passage | Arabic clause | Saheeh International |
|---|---|---|
| 4:146, with سَوْفَ | وَسَوْفَ يُؤْتِ اللَّهُ الْمُؤْمِنِينَ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا | “And Allah is going to give the believers a great reward.” |
| 4:175, with سَـ | فَسَيُدْخِلُهُمْ فِي رَحْمَةٍ مِنْهُ وَفَضْلٍ | “He will admit them to mercy from Himself and bounty” |
Certainty also needs explaining. Al-Ṭībī explains سَـ in affirmation as the counterpart of لَنْ (lan) in negation: each strengthens its statement about what will or will not happen. Al-Zarkashī’s objection is clearer: that explanation would confirm the thing promised, not the promise itself. Saying that a benefit will certainly occur is a statement about the future event. Promising that benefit also gives its recipient an assurance. Al-Zarkashī distinguishes these two claims when explaining what al-Zamakhsharī means by strengthening a promise.
The distinction between promise and threat is also not absolute. Ibn Bābashādh says that sawfa occurs frequently in threats and sa- frequently in promises, but allows both markers in either use. One announcement may promise good to believers while threatening those who turn away. The surrounding statement, not the particle alone, determines whom it reassures and whom it warns.[11]
Context can also make delay meaningful, as al-Sāmarrāʾī explains through the different responses of Yūsuf and his father; the comparison is developed in the note.[12]
The effect: The encounter must not be dismissed as safely distant. Yet urgency and a specified date are different things. The warning makes future knowledge certain and pressing; it does not tell us how many days or years remain.
A stronger repeated warning (التكرار والترتيب الرتبي, takrār and al-tartīb al-rutbī)
Where it is: كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ ثُمَّ كَلَّا سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “No! They are going to know. Then, no! They are going to know.” (78:4–5, Saheeh International).
The plain way: A single “They will know” would announce the coming knowledge once. Repeating it without thumma would confirm the statement but leave the conjunction’s additional force unexpressed.
What it does: The repeated words establish the warning; ثُمَّ raises its force. Ibn ʿĀshūr reasons that repetition already confirms the warning, so the conjunction must add something. He explains الترتيب الرتبي (al-tartīb al-rutbī), succession in rank: the second warning confronts the hearer with a gravity beyond the first impression. Al-Zamakhsharī likewise explains a second warning stronger than the first. Al-Zarkashī adds a reason why admonition returns: desires and heedlessness recur, so a warning may need to be renewed to remain effective.[13]
The greater severity gives the second warning a distinct force even though its words are unchanged (al-Qāsimī, drawing upon al-ʿInāyah). Distance in time and distance in rank share the idea of separation, which explains how thumma can move from a temporal interval to a rise in severity. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī develops this explanation and prefers the rise in severity here while also recording temporal alternatives.[14]
The effect: The listener cannot hear the second warning as a dispensable echo. It renews the rebuke and increases its weight. Iʿrāb, §6 explains why reinforcement need not determine the grammatical label; Q7 weighs the alternatives of two audiences, two experiences or successive times. Here the wording’s most immediate movement is from warning to stronger warning: what they presently dispute will be known, and its gravity exceeds their present estimate.
5. Qirāʾāt
The readings raise two different kinds of question. Some concern pronunciation: what happens to a hamzah, vowel or final consonant when recitation continues or stops? Others concern address: does the sentence say “they” or “you”? The first kind generally leaves the English meaning unchanged; the second changes whom the wording directly addresses.
The rules from the ten readings are presented first. Other reported forms follow separately. A reading’s attribution, its linguistic explanation and its status are distinct matters: a grammarian’s approval does not establish a transmitted reading, and criticism of its grammar does not by itself refute its transmission.
Pronunciation in the ten readings
In the table, وَقْف (waqf) means stopping, وَصْل (waṣl) means continuing, and خُلْف (khulf) means that more than one form is transmitted through the specified reader’s routes.
| Word or connection | Reader and condition | What changes? | Effect on meaning |
|---|---|---|---|
| عَمَّ → عَمَّهْ | Al-Bazzī from Ibn Kathīr and Yaʿqūb, at waqf, with transmitted variation. | A final هْ, hāʾ al-sakt, marks the pause and preserves the preceding vowel. | Still “about what?” The hāʾ is not a pronoun.[1] |
| يَتَسَاءَلُونَ | Ḥamzah, at waqf. | The internal hamzah is softened between hamzah and alif, tashīl bayna bayna. The alif before the hamzah may be lengthened or kept short. | Still “they ask one another”; no new verb or subject.[2] |
| النَّبَإِ | Ḥamzah, and Hishām with khulf, at waqf. | Either the final hamzah becomes an alif, or it is softened between hamzah and yāʾ with rawm: a faint part of its kasrah remains audible. | Still “the news.” Softening is not replacement by a pure yāʾ.[3] |
| هُمْ فِيهِ | Ibn Kathīr and Abū Jaʿfar at waṣl; Qālūn has both forms. | The plural mīm receives a connecting wāw sound: humū. The other readers have a still mīm. All stop with a still mīm. | Still “they.” The extra sound does not add another pronoun.[4] |
| فِيهِ مُخْتَلِفُونَ | Ibn Kathīr at waṣl. | The pronominal hāʾ receives a connecting yāʾ sound. The other nine readings do not lengthen it here. | Still “concerning it”; the referent is unchanged.[5] |
Why are two ways of stopping on al-nabaʾ accepted? Most grammarians and most reciters reasoned that stopping makes the final hamzah still. After the preceding fatḥah, substitution by an alif therefore follows the ordinary rule. They rejected rawm with a softened hamzah because that procedure retains part of the vowel they regarded as removed by the stop.
Ibn al-Jazarī answers from transmission as well as phonetic analysis. When part of the kasrah is retained through rawm, the hamzah can be treated as partially vocalized and softened accordingly. He cites al-Dānī’s transmission through Khalaf, Sulaym and Ḥamzah, together with other early reports of the slight indication of a vowel at pause. He accepts both forms: the ordinary substitution is valid, but the transmitted softening cannot be rejected merely because another grammatical account prefers substitution. He also declines to enlist Sībawayh as a decisive witness: Sībawayh’s general wording does not explicitly settle this particular pause/join distinction.[6]
Why can lengthening remain after a hamzah is softened? The longer form takes account of the hamzah as originally pronounced; the shorter form takes account of the sound after alteration. Ibn al-Jazarī accepts both transmitted approaches. His own analysis favours shortening where the hamzah has disappeared completely, and lengthening where a trace remains. This rule does not authorize an invented intermediate length: transmission, rather than an average between two forms, determines the performance.[7]
Pausing on mukhtalifūn. Some routes from Yaʿqūb add a pause hāʾ after certain words ending in a nūn with fatḥah. On the noun-only account, مُخْتَلِفُونَ belongs to the relevant class of sound masculine plurals. Ibn al-Jazarī, however, records differences over the rule’s extent and says that the majority omit the hāʾ, وعليه العمل, “and this is the practice followed.” The addition is limited to the routes that transmit it. Where reported, the hāʾ marks the pause; it does not mean “his” or introduce another participant.[8]
The pause hāʾ is also attested in Arabic outside recitation. Al-Akhfash gives رَجُلَانِهْ, “two men,” and مُسْلِمُونَهْ, “Muslims,” as examples of adding it after the dual or plural nūn. For expressions such as عَمَّ and فِيمَ, he permits either adding the hāʾ at a stop or omitting it. His linguistic account explains the sound; the transmitted routes determine where it is recited.[9]
Abū Wajzah’s poetry illustrates a further development of that pause sound:
العاطِفُونَتَ، حِينَ مَا مِنْ عاطِفٍ، … والمُفْضِلونَ يَداً، إِذَا مَا أَنْعَمُوا“Those who come to others’ aid when no one else does, and whose hands give generously when they bestow.”
Ibn Manẓūr explains العاطِفُونَتَ through العاطِفُونَهْ: the poet first adds a pause hāʾ after the plural nūn, then treats it like a feminine ending that can be pronounced with tāʾ at a stop. The witness supports the existence of a pause hāʾ after a plural nūn, not a tāʾ reading of مُخْتَلِفُونَ.[10]
Abū al-Najm illustrates the related use of mā:
اللهُ نَجَّاكَ بِكَفَّيْ مَسْلَمَتْ، … مِنْ بَعْدِ ما وبَعْدِ ما وبَعْدِ مَتْ صارَتْ نُفُوسُ القَومِ عِنْد الغَلْصَمَتْ، … وكادتِ الحُرَّةُ أَن تُدْعَى أَمَتْ“Allah saved you by Maslamah’s two hands, after this and after that and after this: the people’s lives had reached their throats, and the free woman almost came to be called a slave.”
The unusual مَتْ is explained through مَهْ: mā takes a final hāʾ, which the poet then treats like a feminine ending and pronounces with tāʾ to match the rhyme. It shows the formation of a pause hāʾ on mā, the linguistic feature involved in عَمَّهْ. The poet’s additional change to tāʾ belongs to this witness, not to the recited form.[11]
Other reported forms in the opening question
| Reported form | Attribution and explanation | Consequence |
|---|---|---|
| عَمَّا, retaining the alif | Ibn Jinnī records it from ʿIkrimah and ʿĪsā in al-Muḥtasab. Al-Zamakhsharī and al-Rāzī identify ʿĪsā as Ibn ʿUmar; other tafsīrs also report the form from Ubayy and Ibn Masʿūd. | A shādhdh form in Ibn Jinnī’s collection. The interrogative alif remains, but the expression still means “about what?”[12] |
| عَمَّهْ in reports discussed as connected speech | Ibn ʿAṭiyyah assigns the form to al-Ḍaḥḥāk and restricts it to stopping. Abū Ḥayyān and al-Samīn also report it from Ibn Kathīr in connected speech treated like a pause. Al-Zamakhsharī offers that explanation or an actual stop before beginning yatasāʾalūna ʿani al-nabaʾ. | The first explanation concerns an exceptional connected form; the second concerns where the reciter actually stops and resumes.[13] |
| يَسَّاءَلُونَ, with yāʾ and a doubled sīn | Al-Zamakhsharī reports it without naming its reader; Ibn Kamāl also discusses it. The tāʾ is assimilated into the sīn. | The sentence remains in the third person: “they ask.”[14] |
| تَسَّاءَلُونَ, with tāʾ and a doubled sīn | Al-Ālūsī reports it from ʿAbd Allāh and Ibn Jubayr, from تَتَسَاءَلُونَ, with the second tāʾ assimilated into the sīn. | The sentence directly addresses the hearers: “you ask.” Its attribution here is a historical report, not a ruling that it belongs to the ten readings.[15] |
Retaining the alif has a linguistic witness as well as a reported reading. Ibn Jinnī regards retention as the weaker of the two Arabic usages; the ordinary interrogative construction deletes the alif after the preposition. The complete poetic witness attributed through Quṭrub to Ḥassān, its translation and its variants appear in Iʿrāb §1; Iʿrāb: Grammatical Analysis, note 6 gives the competing attributions. The poem establishes a use of retained مَا after a preposition. It does not establish the status of a Qurʾānic reading merely by showing that the wording is possible Arabic.[16]
Al-Farrāʾ accepts retention as correct Arabic, and al-Harawī identifies it as a dialect. Their fuller qualification and al-Farrāʾ’s additional poetic witness appear in Iʿrāb §1.[17]
“They will know” and “you will know”
The familiar wording in both verses is سَيَعْلَمُونَ, “they will know.” Reports with سَتَعْلَمُونَ, “you will know,” require care because the authorities do not give one uniform attribution.
| Reported sequence | Authorities and specific report | Change in address |
|---|---|---|
| سَتَعْلَمُونَ … سَتَعْلَمُونَ | Ibn Mujāhid assigns both to Ibn ʿĀmir, qualifying this with “Thus it is in my book from Ibn Dhakwān.” In the same discussion he gives Hishām b. ʿAmmār’s transmission from Ibn ʿĀmir with yāʾ, and yāʾ for the other six of the seven readers. Al-Nīsābūrī names Ibn Mujāhid and al-Naqqāsh from Ibn Dhakwān. | Both warnings say “you.” Ibn ʿĀmir’s transmitters do not all give that form.[18] |
| سَتَعْلَمُونَ … سَتَعْلَمُونَ in other tafsīr reports | Al-Qurṭubī names al-Ḥasan, Abū al-ʿĀliyah and Mālik b. Dīnār. Al-Ālūsī names Mālik, Ibn Miqsam, al-Ḥasan and Ibn ʿĀmir. Al-Samīn reports variation for Ibn ʿĀmir. | The wording is alike, but the named authorities and qualifications differ.[19] |
| سَتَعْلَمُونَ … سَيَعْلَمُونَ | Abū Ḥayyān, al-Samīn and al-Ālūsī report this sequence from al-Ḍaḥḥāk. | The first warning addresses “you”; the second speaks of “them.”[20] |
| سَيَعْلَمُونَ … سَتَعْلَمُونَ | Ibn ʿAṭiyyah reports this opposite sequence; the reader’s name is missing from the text at this point. | The first speaks of “them”; the second addresses “you.” It is not the preceding al-Ḍaḥḥāk report.[21] |
These reported readings change the wording’s person from “they” to “you.” The ten readings use yāʾ in both verses. These tāʾ forms are not adopted in the ten; al-Nashr records no difference among its routes here.[22]
How does direct address change the force? There are two grammatical explanations:
| Explanation | Reasoning and scholarly judgment |
|---|---|
| An understood “Say” | Abū ʿAlī al-Fārisī, quoted by al-Wāḥidī, prefers yāʾ because it maintains the person used earlier: “they ask,” “they differ,” “they will know.” He explains tāʾ through an understood command to the Prophet ﷺ: “Say: you will know.” Al-Bayḍāwī also gives this construction. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah insists on it and regards other explanations as strained. |
| التفات (iltifāt): a turn from speaking about them to addressing them | Al-Rāzī allows the direct turn as appropriate to warning. Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī explain its sharper confrontation and reject the need to insert “Say.” The people who were described at a distance are suddenly addressed themselves. They also connect this with the direct address in the following passage.[23] |
“They will know” exposes the deniers before the listener; “you will know” turns the warning upon its addressees. Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī prefer iltifāt, a direct change of address, over understanding an unspoken “Say”: the sudden address itself intensifies the rebuke. Q7 examines the proposed changes of audience, experience and time.
Pausing on kallā
The two occurrences need not receive identical stopping treatment because the second is preceded by ثُمَّ. Makkī’s classification, transmitted by al-Suyūṭī, permits beginning at كَلَّا in verse 4 but judges stopping on it “not good.” In verse 5 he judges neither beginning at that word nor stopping on it good: the word is connected both to the preceding thumma and to the following “they will know.” The complete comparison appears in Q5. These judgments concern stopping on the particle, not a ban on stopping at either verse ending.[24]
Thaʿlab gives a wider rule: do not stop on kallā anywhere in the Qurʾān, because the point of its answer is completed by what follows. Ibn al-Anbārī reports hearing this judgment from him. Al-Qurṭubī’s permission to stop on the rebuking sense remains a different judgment, explained with its reasoning in Q5.[25]
Notes
The Verses
-
Qurʾān 78:1–5, Saheeh International. ↩
Summary
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:407; al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:443; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10; al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-Karīm al-Raḥmān, 906. ↩
Historical Context and Reports
-
Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Basīṭ, 23:109–111; Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411; al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386; al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:437–438. See the Sūrah Introduction, sections 1–2, for the Makkan classification and proposed chronology. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, ed. ʿAbd Allāh al-Turkī, 24:5. Abū Kurayb narrates from Wakīʿ ibn al-Jarrāḥ, from Mishʿar, as named in this text, from Muḥammad ibn Juḥādah, from al-Ḥasan. The isnad ends with al-Ḥasan, a Tābiʿī, rather than a Companion eyewitness. Al-Suyūṭī, Al-Durr al-manthūr, 8:390, also attributes the account to ʿAbd ibn Ḥumayd, Ibn al-Mundhir, Ibn Abī Ḥātim and Ibn Mardawayh. ʿAbd al-Razzāq al-Mahdī calls this occasion account weak and treats the related explanations from Successors as interpretive judgments, not proof of the occasion (his notes to Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, Dār al-Kitāb al-ʿArabī, 1422 AH, 4:387). ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ, 19:170, without a chain, from Abū Ṣāliḥ from Ibn ʿAbbās. The route is weak. Abū Ḥātim said of Abū Ṣāliḥ (Bādhām) that his hadith is written down but not relied on, and al-Nasāʾī called him not reliable. Ibn ʿAdī knew no early critic who approved of him; Ibn Ḥajar notes that al-ʿIjlī declared him reliable. The contrary judgments must also be considered: Yaḥyā al-Qaṭṭān knew none of his colleagues who had abandoned him, and Ibn Maʿīn said there was no harm in him except in what al-Kalbī relates from him. Ibn al-Qaṭṭān objected to ʿAbd al-Ḥaqq’s description of him as “very weak,” without himself declaring him reliable. Ibn Ḥibbān said that he narrated from Ibn ʿAbbās without having heard from him (Ibn Ḥajar, Tahdhīb al-tahdhīb, Dubai edition, 2:196–198, with Ibn al-Qaṭṭān’s qualification quoted in the accompanying notes). Al-Qurṭubī supplies no complete chain, so it cannot be determined whether this report comes through al-Kalbī. ↩
-
Tafsīr Muqātil ibn Sulaymān, ed. ʿAbd Allāh Maḥmūd Shiḥāta, 4:557, without an isnād for this encounter. ↩
-
Tafsīr Muqātil ibn Sulaymān, 4:555, 557. ʿAbd Allāh Maḥmūd Shiḥāta identifies the prohibition with al-Nisāʾ 4:140. His note gives two variants: manuscript A has وإذا رأيت, “and when you see”; manuscript F has the singular أن إذا سمعت, “that when you hear.” The first wording matches the opening of al-Anʿām 6:68, which gives the same prohibition. Al-Nisāʾ 4:140 itself refers to a prohibition already revealed. Neither variant identifies which Abū Lubābah is meant, and the cited passage gives no isnād for this encounter. ↩
Word-by-Word Analysis
-
Quran.com, word-by-word translations for al-Nabaʾ 78:1–5. ↩
Understanding the Verses
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:6, 9. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:5–7; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26; al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:191–194. Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:8. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, 788–789; al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 4:134–135; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–8. Mujāhid’s explanation is recorded in Tafsīr Mujāhid, p.694, through Ādam b. Abī Iyās, Warqāʾ and Ibn Abī Najīḥ, and in al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:6. Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn grades Ādam’s chain to Mujāhid ṣaḥīḥ in al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581. Muqātil, al-Tafsīr, 4:557; al-Wāḥidī, al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 4:411. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7; al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170–171; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:86; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201–205; al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-Karīm al-Raḥmān, 906. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7, from Qatādah through Bishr, Yazīd and Saʿīd. Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn grades this chain ḥasan in al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581. Qatādah distinguishes acknowledged death from resurrection, which receives affirmation or denial. Ibn ʿUthaymīn separately identifies doubt as a third response: Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26. Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7–8. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12. For the affirmative explanations of kallā and their grammatical consequences, see Deeper Study, Question 5. ↩
-
Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388–389; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12; al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:193–194. Deeper Study, Question 6, distinguishes knowledge of the news from knowledge of its consequences. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–86; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12; al-Zarkashī, Al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 3:8–13. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204–205; al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7–8. ↩
Thematic Connections
-
Qurʾān 77:50, Saheeh International. ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:187–193; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201; al-Suyūṭī, Tanāsuq al-durar, 152. The Qurʾān interpretation connects the closing “statement” directly to the opening “news”; the resurrection interpretation connects the announcement with what the Qurʾān teaches about the return. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12–14; al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:195; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:8–12. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:8; al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:194–198; al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:7–10. Al-Suyūṭī attributes the statement about Allah’s gifts and the duty to give thanks to Qatādah, citing ʿAbd ibn Ḥumayd and Ibn al-Mundhir without reproducing their chains: al-Durr al-manthūr, 8:390. ↩
Gems and Subtleties
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:191–192: "ففي ذلك كله تنبيه على أنه من حقه أن يذعن له كل سامع ويهتم بأمره، لا أن يشك فيه ويجعله موضعاً للنزاع؛ وعظم توبيخهم بقوله: ﴿الذي هم﴾ ... ﴿فيه مختلفون﴾", and "والعظيم لا ينبغي الاختلاف فيه بوجه". Ibn ʿĀshūr finds the same judgement in the word order, فِيهِ placed before مُخْتَلِفُونَ: "وَلِلْإِشْعَارِ بِأَنَّ الِاخْتِلَافَ مَا كَانَ مِنْ حَقِّهِ أَنْ يَتَعَلَّقَ بِهِ" (al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11). His sentence is in his comment on 78:3, but the printed text names the words of 38:68, "عَنْهُ على مُعْرِضُونَ [ص: ٦٨]". The word order itself is explained in the Balāghah, "A settled pattern of disagreement". ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:192: "فإن ذا المروءة لا ينبغي له أن يدخل في أمر إلا وهو على بصيرة فكيف به إذا كان عظيماً ... فكيف به إذا كان أهم ما يهمه فإنه يتعين عليه أن يبحث عنه غاية البحث ويطلب فيه الأدلة ... فكيف إذا كان بحيث تتلى عليهم الأدلة ... وهو يكابر فيه ويماري، ويعاند ويداري". ↩
-
Al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān (ʿAṭāʾāt al-ʿIlm edition), 7:41, on 38:88, reporting "غير واحد من العلماء" on 6:67: "لكل خبر حقيقة ووقوع، فإن كان حقًا تبين صدقه ولو بعد حين، وإن كان كذبًا تبين كذبه". The two verses: "لِّكُلِّ نَبَإٍ مُّسْتَقَرٌّ ۚ وَسَوْفَ تَعْلَمُونَ" (6:67); "وَلَتَعْلَمُنَّ نَبَأَهُۥ بَعْدَ حِينٍۭ" (38:88). Translations: Saheeh International. ↩
-
Al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān (ʿAṭāʾāt al-ʿIlm edition), 7:96, on 40:44, gathering 6:66–67, 38:88, 78:4–5, 102:3–4 and 50:22: "أن الكفار تنكشف لهم يوم القيامة حقائق ما كانوا يكذبون به في الدنيا". He gathers them again at 78:4–5 (7:335–336), the page the book cites in Q7. Why is the warning repeated, and what does *thumma* add?, note 8. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5, explains the question and answer, then concludes: وَذَلِكَ يَدُلُّ عَلَى عِلْمِهِ بِالْغَيْبِ، بَلْ بِجَمِيعِ الْمَعْلُومَاتِ, “This indicates His knowledge of the unseen, indeed of everything that can be known.” He explains that presenting the words as a question and answer makes their meaning easier to understand. Qurʾānic English: Saheeh International, 78:1–2. ↩
-
Al-Zajjāj’s explanation, developed by Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423: اقتضابا للحجة وإسراعا إلى موضع قطعهم, “bringing the argument directly forward and hastening to the point that refutes them decisively.” On this explanation, 78:1 is a complete question and 78:2 supplies its answer. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah illustrates the same construction with 6:19. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12–13, identifies the denial of the idols’ divinity and the restoration of human bodies, then says: وهما الْأَصْلَانِ اللَّذَانِ أَثَارَا تَكْذِيبَهُمْ بِأَنَّهُ مِنْ عِنْدِ اللَّهِ, “They are the two principles that provoked their denial that it was from Allah.” He continues by describing their alliance against the Messenger ﷺ and their efforts to spread that denial. Qurʾānic English: Saheeh International, 78:2. ↩
Contemporary Applications
Common Misconceptions
-
Ibn Bāz, Majmūʿ fatāwā wa-maqālāt mutanawwiʿah, 7:74; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Majmūʿ fatāwā wa-rasāʾil, 1:57–60, questions 18–19. ↩
-
Al-Bukhārī, al-Ṣaḥīḥ, al-Sulṭāniyyah printing, no.5269 (7:46), Kitāb al-ṭalāq, from Abū Hurayrah رضي الله عنه. ↩
-
Muslim, al-Ṣaḥīḥ, ed. Muḥammad Fuʾād ʿAbd al-Bāqī, no.132 (1:119), Kitāb al-īmān, chapter on unwanted thoughts concerning faith and what a person experiencing them should say, from Abū Hurayrah رضي الله عنه. ↩
-
Ibn Taymiyyah, al-Īmān, pp. 221–222; quoted by Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Majmūʿ fatāwā wa-rasāʾil, 1:58. ↩
-
Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Majmūʿ fatāwā wa-rasāʾil, 1:59, the distant-cities and washed-garment comparisons. ↩
-
Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Majmūʿ fatāwā wa-rasāʾil, 1:60. ↩
Points for Reflection
Q1. How does the opening connect with the surrounding passages?
-
Qurʾān 77:50, Saheeh International. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201–205. ↩
-
Al-Suyūṭī, Tanāsuq al-durar, 152; al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:3; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:5–6. ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:187–193. Ibn al-Zubayr’s explanation is quoted at 21:192–193. Abū Jaʿfar ibn al-Zubayr al-Gharnāṭī, al-Burhān fī tanāsub suwar al-Qurʾān, pp. 354–355. ↩
-
Al-Suyūṭī, Tanāsuq al-durar, 152; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201; al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:3; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:5–6; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1741–1744. ↩
-
Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383; al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:175, 177–178; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Durra, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:395–396, quoting al-Jamal; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201.
Abū Ḥayyān explains this connection; al-Nasafī in al-Taysīr joins the two designations; al-Durra quotes al-Jamal’s explanation. Al-Ālūsī reports this account while preferring resurrection as the news. ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:187–193. Ibn al-Zubayr’s explanation is quoted at 21:192–193. Abū Jaʿfar ibn al-Zubayr al-Gharnāṭī, al-Burhān fī tanāsub suwar al-Qurʾān, pp. 354–355.
Al-Biqāʿī develops the first argument. Abū Jaʿfar ibn al-Zubayr al-Gharnāṭī follows the warnings through creation’s wisdom to the appointed Day and its different outcomes. ↩
-
Al-Suyūṭī, Tanāsuq al-durar, 152; al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:3; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:5–6.
Al-Suyūṭī compares this correspondence with the questions recalling divine gifts in al-Ḍuḥā and al-Sharḥ. Al-Marāghī and al-Zuḥaylī also identify the parallel questions. ↩
-
Al-Suyūṭī, Tanāsuq al-durar, 152; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201; al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:3; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:5–6; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1741–1744.
Al-Suyūṭī develops the summary-to-detail connection. Al-Ālūsī quotes him. Al-Marāghī, al-Zuḥaylī and the Academy’s al-Wasīṭ explain these shared themes and their further development. ↩
-
Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:177–178, including the manuscript variant reported by Māhir Adīb Ḥabbūsh and Jamāl ʿAbd al-Raḥīm al-Fāris; Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, introduction to al-Nabaʾ, English translation.
Al-Nasafī’s al-Taysīr connects the arrangements for life; a manuscript variant instead refers to preparation for the return. Mawdūdī emphasizes their shared affirmation of resurrection and warning about people’s response. ↩
-
Muḥammad Fārūq al-Zayn, Bayān al-naẓm fī al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:272–274.
Muḥammad Fārūq al-Zayn’s later synthesis pairs 77:38 with 78:17, 77:35–36 with 78:37, and 77:7 with 78:40. ↩
-
Qurʾān 78:6, Saheeh International. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12–13; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:86. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:13–14. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8, 12; Ibn ʿĀdil, al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-kitāb, 20:95; al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān, 6:431. For the developed proof and its other supporting accounts, see 78:6–7, Q2. The distinct contextual and tawḥīd accounts are compared in Q2’s opening note and its note on the proof’s purposes. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:390; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:685; Ibn al-Munayyir, al-Intiṣāf, accompanying that passage; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:88. The gratitude, guidance, judgment and unified-governance arguments, with the objection to an imposed obligation, are developed in 78:6–7, Q2. See also the source-specific notes on gratitude and guidance, judgment, truth made plain, one Governor and the connected purposes. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:86–88, prefers the death-like sleep and renewed-life connection; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:294–295, 298, reproduces it. Niẓām al-Dīn al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān, 6:430–431, instead prefers rest in a sequence of benefits. Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, English edition, 8:683–685, develops the progression toward verse 17; Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, English Al-Nabaʾ chapter, pp. 10–13, emphasizes coordinated provision. Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:206: واختار المحققون كون السبات هنا بمعنى الموت لأنه أنسب بالمقام, “The verifying scholars chose that subāt here means death, because it is more fitting to the context.” Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:18–19, joins the resemblance to death and resurrection with restorative rest, treating rest as the resulting meaning. See 78:9, Q1 for the alternatives and objections. ↩
-
Qurʾān 78:17, Saheeh International. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:88. ↩
Q2. Who is asking, and why open with a question?
-
Qurʾān 78:1, Saheeh International, Quran.com translation. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5, second issue. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, 437–438; Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 2:160–2:162; Sahl al-Tustarī, Tafsīr al-Tustarī, 31–32.
Al-Rāghib explains this general principle; al-Samīn develops it in his lexical discussion. Al-Tustarī turns the question upon the questioners: “For what reason do you ask Muḥammad ﷺ, when he knows best?” Al-Rāghib and al-Samīn explain the purpose of a divine question; al-Tustarī explains whom the address concerns. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, 437–438. ↩
-
Al-Zajjāj, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān wa-iʿrābuhu, 5:271; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:110–23:111; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411; Al-Samʿānī, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 6:135; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:387; Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:35; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:245; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:90–20:92; Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383; Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:482; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:395; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:6–30:7; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:6; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:7; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1744; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:406. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430.
Al-Zajjāj explains the magnifying question; al-Baghawī, al-Wāḥidī in al-Basīṭ and al-Wasīṭ, and al-Samʿānī transmit that explanation. Ibn al-Jawzī explains magnification. Al-Zamakhsharī develops the unequalled-kind comparison; al-Bayḍāwī, al-Nasafī, Ibn Kamāl, al-Maẓharī and Muḥammad al-Hilāl also explain magnification. Al-Rāzī develops both instruction and magnification; Ibn ʿĀdil transmits his reasoning. Al-Nīsābūrī also develops instruction through question and answer and magnification through greatness beyond comprehension. Abū Ḥayyān, al-Ṣābūnī and al-Darrah include wonder or awe. Al-Marāghī, Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Zuḥaylī and the Academy’s al-Wasīṭ explain the effect of question followed by answer. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, in the continuation of Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, explains withholding followed by identification. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:6, 9. He calls the opening’s indication of the coming subject barāʿat al-istihlāl. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5–6, fourth issue. His comparisons include questions about the nature of an angel, spirit and jinn, and the magnifying questions concerning Sijjīn (83:8) and the steep path (90:12). ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684. His further examples ask the nature of the ghūl and ʿanqāʾ, illustrating inquiry about an unfamiliar kind of thing before explaining the transfer to magnification. ↩
-
Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:221; Abū Ḥayyān, al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383; Ibn Qutaybah, Taʾwīl mushkil al-Qurʾān, pp.171–172. The al-Nabaʾ and al-Mursalāt examples appear under wonder; rebuke begins the following category. ↩
-
ʿAbd al-Raḥmān Ḥabannakah al-Maydānī, al-Balāghah al-ʿArabiyyah, 1:258, 1:269, 1:270, 1:271, 1:277. On the different purposes of questions in Arabic. ↩
-
Ibn Qutaybah, Taʾwīl mushkil al-Qurʾān, 171; Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:178; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171.
Ibn Qutaybah places the passage specifically under wonder. Al-Nasafī (al-Taysīr) explains rebuke; al-Qāsimī offers magnification or rebuke. Al-Maẓharī allows a renewed question that challenges asking about news whose truth is clear. ↩
-
Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:5; Al-Zajjāj, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān wa-iʿrābuhu, 5:271; Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:109–23:111; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:90–20:93; Al-Kirmānī, Gharāʾib al-tafsīr wa-ʿajāʾib al-taʾwīl, 2:1295; Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:221; Al-Bāqūlī, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:580; Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; Maḥmūd al-Ṣāfī, Al-Jadwal fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 15:213; Muḥyī al-Dīn al-Darwīsh, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān wa-bayānuhu, 10:350–10:351; Abū al-Baqāʾ al-ʿUkbarī, Al-Tibyān fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:1266; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:794; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7981–12:7983; Aḥmad al-Kharrāṭ, Al-Mujtabā min mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 4:1407; Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, Al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:647–10:648; Al-Ṭībī, Futūḥ al-ghayb, 16:242–16:243. Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384. Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170. Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423.
Al-Ṭabarī and al-Zajjāj explain verse 2 as an answer; Abū Ḥayyān reports al-Zajjāj’s explanation. Ibn Juzayy and al-Ālūsī prefer it. Al-Qurṭubī reports al-Mahdawī’s understood-answer analysis. Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, al-Ṣāfī and al-Darwīsh also understand an answering verb.
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah attributes the “why” construction to most grammarians; al-Wāḥidī and al-Rāzī give it as al-Farrāʾ’s and the Kūfans’ choice. Al-Kirmānī also records it under al-gharīb. Ibn Juzayy prefers the question-and-answer construction as more eloquent.
Al-Kirmānī records substitution with an understood interrogative under al-ʿajīb. His labels al-gharīb and al-ʿajīb distinguish his presentation, not an explicit rejection. Aḥmad al-Kharrāṭ gives substitution; al-Farrāʾ allows a repeated prepositional construction. Al-Bāqūlī objects that the questioning force needs explaining. Al-Ṭībī reports the objection from the author of al-Kashf and al-ʿUkbarī’s alternative. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Basīṭ, al-Rāzī, Ibn ʿĀdil, Makkī, al-ʿUkbarī and al-Samīn compare the constructions. Al-Qurṭubī also records the interrogative objection. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:9. His comparisons are the understood sun in 38:32 and soul in 75:26; the alternative involves iltifāt, a change in the manner of address. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:5; Al-Māwardī, Al-Nukat wa-l-ʿuyūn, 6:182; Al-Thalabī, Al-Kashf wa-l-bayān, 28:303; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wajīz, 1165; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:37; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438; Al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-Karīm al-Raḥmān, 906; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:482; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:5; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:248; Al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199. Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, notes 1–3, English translation.
Al-Ṭabarī, al-Māwardī, al-Thalabī and Ibn Kathīr identify the Meccan opponents in explaining the opening; al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wajīz names Quraysh. Al-Rāzī develops the continuity argument. Ibn Kamāl, Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Shawkānī explicitly object to including believers under the rebuke. Al-Saʿdī, al-Qāsimī, al-Ṣābūnī, al-Marāghī, Ṭanṭāwī and Mawdūdī describe denying or doubting opponents. Al-Khāzin and al-Baghawī give the setting as questioning the mission and its announcements. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:245; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp.313–314; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171–10:172; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430.
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Bayḍāwī, al-Nasafī, al-Rāzī, Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Ibn Juzayy, Muḥammad al-Hilāl, al-Kūrānī and al-Maẓharī preserve this alternative. Al-Maẓharī explicitly distinguishes seeking greater certainty from mockery and restricts the rebuke accordingly. Abū Ḥayyān reports an all-world audience containing believers and deniers. Al-Nīsābūrī reports believers seeking greater fear and preparation alongside deniers mocking. Al-Ālūsī records broader constructions but prefers deniers and doubters. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6, sixth issue, first and second possibilities. Al-Zamakhsharī identifies the people of Mecca and also records the broader audience construction in al-Kashshāf, 4:684. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ, 19:170, from al-Ḍaḥḥāk from Ibn ʿAbbās; the route is broken. Ibn Ḥajar, Tahdhīb al-tahdhīb, 6:163.
Al-Qurṭubī reports al-Ḍaḥḥāk’s account from Ibn ʿAbbās alongside the Quraysh explanation. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ, 19:170, without a chain, from al-Ḍaḥḥāk from Ibn ʿAbbās. The route is broken: al-Ḍaḥḥāk b. Muzāḥim did not meet Ibn ʿAbbās. ʿAbd al-Malik b. Maysarah, through Shuʿbah, said he took his tafsīr from Saʿīd b. Jubayr, and Ibn Ḥibbān said that whoever claims he met Ibn ʿAbbās is mistaken (Ibn Ḥajar, Tahdhīb al-tahdhīb, 6:163). ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6, fifth issue and third audience possibility; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684, on questioning the Messenger ﷺ and believers. The conversation explanation is attributed to al-Farrāʾ. Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl Bāshā, 9:36. ↩
-
Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:227; Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:36; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:245; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp.313–314; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171; Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:389; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84–9:85; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, 3:125. Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, sixth edition (1341 AH), p.3. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430.
Ibn Fūrak explains mutual questioning; al-Farrāʾ explains their conversation. Al-Rāzī reports al-Farrāʾ’s explanation.
Al-Nīsābūrī includes mocking questions to the Messenger ﷺ and believers. Al-Māturīdī distinguishes unbelieving questioners from believing respondents. Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Qāsimī explain why this form need not always imply reciprocal action. ↩
-
Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:227; Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:36; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:245; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp.313–314; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171; Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:389; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84–9:85; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, 3:125. Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, sixth edition (1341 AH), p.3. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430.
Al-Zamakhsharī and Ibn Kamāl join the two actions. Al-Rāzī, al-Bayḍāwī, al-Nasafī, Muḥammad al-Hilāl, al-Kūrānī, al-Maẓharī and Muḥammad ʿAbduh discuss the alternative recipients. ↩
-
Al-Tustarī, Tafsīr al-Tustarī, pp.31–32. The al-Nabaʾ example follows his explanation of confronting descendants with their ancestors’ actions and of addressing the community through the Prophet ﷺ. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:202; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:36. Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī give reciprocal questioning first and questioning others as a reported alternative. Al-Zamakhsharī and Ibn Kamāl describe both actions together. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:8–9. He compares genuine inquiry with 34:8 and 27:67–68, and outwardly performed conduct with 9:64. His illustrative exchanges explain the difference of intention. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt Ahl al-Sunna, 10:397–398. The argument returns to the opening while discussing the contrast between the outcomes of the heedful and heedless. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84; al-Maẓharī, al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171; Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, p. 9; Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:683, English edition. ↩
-
Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, 3:126; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:190–21:192; Al-Qushayrī, Laṭāʾif al-ishārāt, 3:675–3:676. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:8; Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:397–10:398; Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, 3:126; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:190–21:192; Al-Qushayrī, Laṭāʾif al-ishārāt, 3:675–3:676. Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, p.9, English edition; Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, English translation, 8:682–683.
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84; al-Maẓharī, al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171.
Al-Zamakhsharī and Abū al-Suʿūd explain mocking or denying inquiry. Al-Maẓharī’s second explanation disapproves of asking at all about this clear news. Al-Biqāʿī says questioning is fitting for what is hidden. Quṭb and Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ describe the opening as rejecting the questioners and their inquiry.
Ibn ʿĀshūr explicitly prefers including genuine and performed inquiry together. Al-Māturīdī develops inquiry leading through reflection to faith. Ibn Fūrak identifies the blameworthy aim as repelling truth and supporting falsehood. Al-Biqāʿī argues that great news deserves serious investigation. Al-Qushayrī connects repeated questioning with the varied proofs that follow. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl Bāshā, 9:37; al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:439. ↩
Q3. What is “the great news”?
-
Qurʾān 78:2, Saheeh International, Quran.com translation. The hyphen connects the translation with verse 3, which identifies the news as that over which they disagree. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:9–10, quoting al-Rāghib and comparing al-Qāmūs, al-Ṣiḥāḥ and Lisān al-ʿArab. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, 788–789; Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 4:134–4:135. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Asās al-balāghah, 2:239–2:240; Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 1:162–1:164; Muḥammad ʿAlī al-Ṣābūnī, Rawāʾiʿ al-bayān, 2:471–2:472. ↩
-
Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 5:385–5:386; Muḥammad Ḥasan Jabal, Al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 4:2146–4:2148. ↩
-
Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 5:385, entry نبأ. Ibn Fāris names Dhū al-Rummah for the sound witness. ʿAbd al-Salām Muḥammad Hārūn attributes the other poetic witness to al-Akhṭal in his note, citing Lisān al-ʿArab under قذا and نبأ; he also records the variant opening ولكن قذاها زائر لا نحبه, “But what troubles it is a visitor we do not like.” ↩
-
Muḥammad Ḥasan Jabal, Al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 4:2146–4:2148. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, 573; Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 4:355; Muḥammad Ḥasan Jabal, Al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 3:1488; Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 12:409–12:412. ↩
-
Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 4:355, entry عظم. He explains العظيمة as النازلة الملمة الشديدة, “a severe calamity that befalls someone.” ʿAbd al-Salām Muḥammad Hārūn’s note attributes the poetry to al-Aswad b. Sarīʿ al-Qāṣṣ, citing al-Bayān, 1:367. ↩
-
Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, p.9, English edition. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170–171. He introduces the argument from verse 17 as that of “some of our scholars,” after stating his own preference. ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:200: إن يوم الفصل أي الذي هو النبأ العظيم، وتقدم الإنذار به في المرسلات, “Indeed, the Day of Decision, that is, the great news; warning of it has already occurred in al-Mursalāt.” “Day of Judgement” is Saheeh International’s translation of يَوْمِ الْفَصْلِ in both passages. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:6–8. Qatādah is transmitted through Saʿīd; Ibn Zayd through Yūnus and Ibn Wahb. Ibn Zayd explains the deniers’ objection rather than recounting a particular exchange he witnessed. The words cited in Ibn Zayd’s report are Ṣād 38:67–68, although ʿAbd Allāh b. ʿAbd al-Muḥsin al-Turkī’s accompanying reference says 38:68–69. ↩
-
Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411–4:412. ↩
-
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:406–8:409. ↩
-
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:407–8:408. ↩
-
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8/407–408; al-Baqarah 2:72–73; Saheeh International, translation of 2:73. ↩
-
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8/407–408; al-Baqarah 2:260; Saheeh International, translation of 2:260. ↩
-
Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293–298; al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438–5:439. Al-Zamakhsharī’s and al-Nasafī’s argument from wisdom is developed in 78:6–7 Q2. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7. His phrase about the trumpet is accompanied by a reference to Ṭā Hā 20:102; the local argument proceeds through al-Nabaʾ’s created signs to its description of the trumpet. ↩
-
Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–31:8; Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:169–19:171; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84–9:88; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:202–15:205; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438–5:439; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:406–8:409; Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684–4:685; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589–3:590; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Al-Qushayrī, Laṭāʾif al-ishārāt, 3:675–3:676; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:36–9:39; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp. 313–314; Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:292–10:298; Al-Zajjāj, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān wa-iʿrābuhu, 5:271–5:272. Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:494, main text and note.
Al-Zajjāj, Ibn Kathīr, al-Rāzī, al-Qurṭubī, Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Ālūsī, al-Shawkānī, ʿAṭiyyah Sālim and al-Ṣābūnī explicitly favour this explanation with reasons. Al-Ṣābūnī’s note credits Abū al-Suʿūd. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Nasafī, al-Bayḍāwī, al-Qushayrī, Ibn Kamāl, al-Kūrānī, al-Nīsābūrī and Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī make it their main explanation. Al-Zamakhsharī also records the Qurʾān and mission alternatives; al-Qurṭubī reports the Qurʾān through Abū Ṣāliḥ from Ibn ʿAbbās and the Prophet’s affair anonymously, while preferring resurrection. ↩
-
Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wajīz, 1165; Al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-Karīm al-Raḥmān, 906; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:5–30:9; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1742–10:1748; Muḥammad Fārūq al-Zayn, Bayān al-naẓm fī al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:272–4:274; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388–9:390; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:8–30:12. Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, notes 1–3, English translation; Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, pp.9–13, English edition; Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:682–685, English edition.
Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wajīz, al-Saʿdī, al-Marāghī, the Academy’s al-Wasīṭ and Muḥammad Fārūq al-Zayn’s Bayān al-naẓm give resurrection. Al-Qāsimī’s context points to it without a separately stated exclusive verdict in his opening paragraph. Al-Zuḥaylī adopts resurrection and cites Ibn Kathīr’s and al-Rāzī’s reasons. Mawdūdī, Quṭb and Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ likewise explain the Day. ↩
-
Muqātil b. Sulaymān, al-Tafsīr, 4:557–558. Abū al-Maʿālī ʿAzīzī b. ʿAbd al-Malik likewise includes “great news” among the Qurʾān’s names, citing 78:1–2, in the list transmitted by al-Zarkashī in al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:273–276, especially 274. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:5–24:8; Mujāhid, Tafsīr Mujāhid, 694; Al-Bukhārī, Ṣaḥīḥ al-Bukhārī, 9:152; ʿAbd al-Razzāq, al-Tafsīr (Dār al-Kutub al-ʿIlmiyyah, 1419 AH), 3:382; Ibn Mardawayh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, transcribed and collated by Abū Ḥamzah al-Shāmī, on 78:1–2, reports 7–8; Al-Suyūṭī, Al-Durr al-manthūr, 8:390; A group of researchers, Mawsūʿat al-tafsīr al-maʾthūr, 22:594–22:598; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn, Al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581. The editorial notes in Ḥikmat Yāsīn’s edition of Ibn Kathīr’s Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 7:459, separately call the isnad of Qatādah’s shorter resurrection explanation through Saʿīd ibn Abī ʿArūbah ṣaḥīḥ. The same notes call Mujāhid’s Qurʾān explanation through Ādam and al-Ṭabarī ṣaḥīḥ in isnad, naming the intermediary as “Saʿīd ibn Abī Najīḥ”; Tafsīr Mujāhid names Ibn Abī Najīḥ. The ḥasan judgment in al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr concerns Qatādah’s fuller affirmation-and-denial explanation; the ṣaḥīḥ judgment in the Ibn Kathīr notes concerns his shorter identification of resurrection. Al-Suyūṭī’s grouped Mujāhid attribution does not match ʿAbd al-Razzāq’s own Qatādah chain. Al-Bukhārī gives Mujāhid’s explanation without its chain here, as a muʿallaq report.
Both Ibn Mardawayh chains pass through Ḥuṣayn ibn Mukhāriq, Abū Junādah. Al-Dāraquṭnī calls him matrūk, abandoned as a transmitter (al-Ḍuʿafāʾ wa-l-matrūkūn, published in Majallat al-Jāmiʿah al-Islāmiyyah, issue 60, 1403 AH, p.149, entry 177). Ibn Ḥibbān says that he narrates from al-Aʿmash material that is not al-Aʿmash’s and permits neither narrating from him nor relying on him except for iʿtibār, examination alongside other transmissions (al-Majrūḥīn, ed. Maḥmūd Ibrāhīm Zāyid, Dār al-Waʿy, 1396 AH, 3:155–156). Al-Dhahabī identifies Abū Junādah as Ḥuṣayn ibn Mukhāriq in Mīzān al-iʿtidāl, 1:554, entry 2097.
Al-Ṭabarī reports Mujāhid for the Qurʾān, Qatādah for resurrection and Ibn Zayd for the coming Day. The collected Tafsīr Mujāhid and al-Bukhārī report Mujāhid’s Qurʾān explanation; ʿAbd al-Razzāq reports Qatādah through Maʿmar for the Qurʾān. Ibn Mardawayh reports Ibn ʿAbbās through two weak chains, both passing through Ḥuṣayn ibn Mukhāriq; one includes Mujāhid. Al-Suyūṭī and the Mawsūʿat al-tafsīr al-maʾthūr preserve these reports; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn grades Ādam b. Abī Iyās’s isnad to Mujāhid ṣaḥīḥ and al-Ṭabarī’s isnad for Qatādah’s affirmation-and-denial explanation ḥasan. The editorial notes in Ḥikmat Yāsīn’s edition of Ibn Kathīr separately grade the isnad of Qatādah’s shorter resurrection explanation ṣaḥīḥ. ↩
-
Al-Māwardī, Al-Nukat wa-l-ʿuyūn, 6:182–6:183; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:387–4:389; Al-Thalabī, Al-Kashf wa-l-bayān, 28:303–28:305; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423–5:424; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:93–20:94; Al-Samʿānī, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 6:135–6:136; Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, on 78:1–5; Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:178–15:180; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171–10:172; Al-Samarqandī, Baḥr al-ʿulūm, 3:536–3:537; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:245–12:247; Al-Ṭībī, Futūḥ al-ghayb, 16:240–16:243; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7983–12:7986.
Al-Māwardī: The Qurʾān from Mujāhid; the Day from Ibn Zayd; resurrection from Qatādah; the Prophet’s affair in an unnamed opinion.
Ibn al-Jawzī: The Qurʾān from Mujāhid, Muqātil and al-Farrāʾ; resurrection from Qatādah; the Prophet’s affair as recorded by al-Zajjāj.
Al-Thalabī and Ibn Fūrak: The Qurʾān from Mujāhid; resurrection from Qatādah.
Al-Nasafī (al-Taysīr): The Qurʾān from Mujāhid; resurrection from Qatādah; prophecy from al-Ḥasan.
Ibn ʿĀdil: He attributes the Qurʾān and, in another report, the Prophet’s affair to Ibn ʿAbbās without giving a chain here; resurrection to Qatādah.
Al-Samʿānī: A weak attribution through Abū Ṣāliḥ to Ibn ʿAbbās identifies the Qurʾān; he attributes resurrection to Qatādah, Abū al-ʿĀliyah and al-Rabīʿ, and prophecy to al-Ḥasan. He calls the Qurʾān and resurrection explanations well known.
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah: He attributes the whole revealed law to Ibn ʿAbbās and Qatādah without giving a chain here; the Qurʾān to Mujāhid and Qatādah; resurrection also to Qatādah.
Makkī: The Qurʾān from Mujāhid; resurrection from Qatādah; the Day from Ibn Zayd.
Al-Samarqandī: He begins with the Qurʾān and also records resurrection and the prophetic mission.
Muḥammad al-Hilāl: The Qurʾān, resurrection, prophecy, tawḥīd, or these together. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:6; ʿAbd al-Razzāq, al-Tafsīr (Dār al-Kutub al-ʿIlmiyyah, 1419 AH), 3:382, report 3450, from Maʿmar, from Qatādah. Mujāhid, Tafsīr Mujāhid, p.694; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn, al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581. Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, attributed to Ibn Mardawayh, transcribed and collated by Abū Ḥamzah al-Shāmī, on 78:1–2, reports 7–8, ends both chains with Ibn ʿAbbās رضي الله عنهما; Mujāhid is an intermediary in the second. ↩
-
Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:443, on the Qurʾān interpretation transmitted from a group of the Tābiʿūn, the generation following the Companions. His contextual preference for resurrection appears at 5:439. ↩
-
Al-Suyūṭī, Al-Itqān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:178–1:181; Al-Suyūṭī, Muʿtarak al-aqrān, 2:326–2:332; Al-Zarkashī, Al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:273–1:276. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7, first argument for the Qurʾān explanation. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7. His terms distinguish khabar, a report, from mukhbar ʿanhu, what is reported about. The supporting designations are dhikr, tadhkira, dhikrā, hidāya and ḥadīth. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7, reply concerning the adjective “great.” ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7. He introduces these as replies available to the respective arguments, without assigning them to newly named speakers. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7, conclusion of the lexical debate. Al-Ṣābūnī also favours resurrection on the evidence of the following verses, citing Abū al-Suʿūd: Ṣafwat al-Tafāsīr, 3:494, note; the same discussion is at 3:482–483 in another edition. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:202. His judgment on the defence is وفيه بعد, “there is remoteness in it.” ↩
-
Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386; al-Maẓharī, al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171; al-Wāḥidī, al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:111, and al-Wasīṭ, 4:411. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6–7; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:86; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201–205; al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:443; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:407; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10; Ibn Juzayy, al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:191; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, p.25; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:407. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah supplies no chain for the whole-law explanation he attributes to Ibn ʿAbbās and Qatādah. For Ibn ʿĀshūr the news is every great announcement the Prophet ﷺ brought, the Qurʾān first among them, and the early identifications are examples of it. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah also reports Qatādah as calling it the Qurʾān and the raising from the graves. ↩
-
Muqātil b. Sulaymān, Tafsīr Muqātil, 4:557; Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:227; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:111–23:112; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411–4:412; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171–10:172; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:396.
Muqātil gives the Qurʾān and its divine source. Al-Farrāʾ explains it as the Qurʾān. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Basīṭ gives the Qurʾān as the view of all the commentators; al-Wasīṭ argues for it from verse 3. Al-Baghawī and al-Khāzin report that “most” give the Qurʾān. Al-Baghawī also reports Qatādah for resurrection; al-Khāzin retains resurrection and the prophetic mission. Al-Maẓharī reports Mujāhid and a majority for the Qurʾān, Qatādah for resurrection, and allows the mission. Al-Darrah identifies what the Prophet ﷺ brought in the Qurʾān, including resurrection. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7, third explanation. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt Ahl al-Sunna, 10:389–390. The concluding phrase بالتوقف الموجب للعلم, literally “with the withholding of judgment that leads to knowledge,” is unclear in its precise construction. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt Ahl al-Sunna, 10:390. See 78:6–7 Q2 for power and knowledge, possibility and announcement, wisdom and Ibn al-Munayyir’s objection, and gratitude and guidance. His rain account, 10:390, 393, has its full treatment in 78:14–16, Commentators; his argument from the limits of human understanding is in 78:6–7 Q2. The actual revivals cited by ʿAṭiyyah Sālim are explained in 78:9 Q2. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10, 12–13. He attributes resurrection to Mujāhid here, whereas al-Ṭabarī’s Mujāhid report gives the Qurʾān. ↩
-
Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:191–21:192; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26; Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:389–10:390; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:406–8:409. ↩
-
Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:8–30:14; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:191–21:194; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26; Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384; Abū Bakr al-Jazāʾirī, Aysar al-tafāsīr, 5:500–5:502; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:247–15:249; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:406–8:409. Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, sixth edition (1341 AH), p.3.
Ibn Juzayy adopts the whole revealed law. Ibn ʿĀshūr adopts the generic class of great announcements. Al-Biqāʿī includes mission, Book and Day, especially resurrection; Ibn ʿUthaymīn includes all guidance, especially the Hereafter. Abū Ḥayyān’s initial explanation is the Messenger’s affair and Qurʾān, with resurrection as an alternative. Al-Jazāʾirī’s main text is comprehensive, while his note specifies resurrection. Ṭanṭāwī and Muḥammad ʿAbduh explain connected announcements. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim affirms their mutual implication but then prefers resurrection here. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:389–10:391.
Al-Māturīdī explicitly declines to determine one subject categorically without adequate knowledge. This is not the same judgment as Ibn ʿĀshūr’s affirmative comprehensive interpretation. ↩
-
Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430. ↩
-
Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Kamāl Khujandī, Ghazals, no.198, Ganjoor edition, text supplied by Sayyid Jābir Mūsavī. The main text quotes and translates the Ganjoor wording, not Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī’s wording. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī quotes «زاهد تعجب كر كند از عشق تو پرهيز ... كين لذت اين باده چهـ داند كه نخوردست». The Ganjoor text has «چه عجب گر», “what wonder if,” and «کس», “anyone,” where the two versions differ. ↩
-
Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293.
Al-Nīsābūrī reports an identification with ʿAlī, while his own account favours resurrection. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī separately signals an analogy of the heart’s revival after the ego’s death; his literal explanation remains bodily resurrection. ↩
Q4. What does their disagreement consist of?
-
Qurʾān 78:3, Saheeh International, Quran.com translation. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7; ʿAbd al-Razzāq, Tafsīr ʿAbd al-Razzāq, 3:382; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn, Al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581; Al-Māwardī, Al-Nukat wa-l-ʿuyūn, 6:182–6:183; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:388; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Thalabī, Al-Kashf wa-l-bayān, 28:304; Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170; Al-Samʿānī, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 6:135; Al-Samarqandī, Baḥr al-ʿulūm, 3:536; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; Muqātil b. Sulaymān, Tafsīr Muqātil, 4:557–4:558; Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:227. Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7983.
Qatādah gives the witnessed-death argument, transmitted fully by al-Ṭabarī and more briefly by ʿAbd al-Razzāq; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn grades the fuller chain ḥasan. Al-Ṭabarī states affirmation and denial in his own explanation. Al-Māwardī and Ibn al-Jawzī report Qatādah and the distinct believer/denier allocation attributed to Yaḥyā b. Sallām. Al-Baghawī, al-Thalabī, al-Qurṭubī, al-Samʿānī and al-Samarqandī preserve affirmation and denial. Makkī relates affirmation and denial to either the Qurʾān or resurrection and reports Qatādah’s two groups. Ibn Kathīr adopts it and uses verse 3 to support resurrection. Muqātil and al-Farrāʾ connect affirmation and denial with the Qurʾān. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7, from Qatādah through Saʿīd, with two chains. Both give the full contrast between witnessed death and disputed resurrection; Bishr’s route adds “all of them.” For its grading: Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn, al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581. The shorter Maʿmar version gives only affirmation and denial; see ʿAbd al-Razzāq, al-Tafsīr (Dār al-Kutub al-ʿIlmiyyah, 1419 AH), 3:382, no.3451. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7, his explanation preceding the Qatādah narrations. ↩
-
Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26; Abū Bakr al-Jazāʾirī, Aysar al-tafāsīr, 5:500–5:501. Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, English translation, 8:682–683.
Ibn ʿUthaymīn explicitly identifies all three. Al-Jazāʾirī’s main explanation and Maʿāriful Qurʾān contrast believers and deniers; Ibn ʿUthaymīn explicitly adds doubt as a third response. ↩
-
Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6, first answer to the objection about agreement in denying resurrection. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:92; Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:37; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171–10:172; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp. 313–314; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10–30:11; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:482; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:248; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1743–10:1744; Al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-Karīm al-Raḥmān, 906; Al-Qushayrī, Laṭāʾif al-ishārāt, 3:675. Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, sixth edition (1341 AH), p.3.
Al-Rāzī develops this answer; Ibn ʿĀdil transmits the argument. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Nasafī, al-Bayḍāwī, Ibn Kamāl, al-Maẓharī and al-Kūrānī give it while differing over the broader alternative. Al-Ālūsī explicitly prefers it. Ibn ʿĀshūr includes both degrees of denial and competing descriptions. Al-Qāsimī, al-Ṣābūnī, Ṭanṭāwī, Muḥammad ʿAbduh and the Academy’s al-Wasīṭ also distinguish doubtful from denying responses. Al-Saʿdī stresses their denial despite the news’s certainty; al-Qushayrī distinguishes strong denial from lack of clarity. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6. In his classification, most Christians affirm a spiritual return while denying bodily resurrection. ↩
-
Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:179; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:292–10:293; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:5–30:6. Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, note 1, English translation.
Al-Nasafī (al-Taysīr) and Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī preserve this distinction alongside denial and doubt. Al-Rāzī, al-Nīsābūrī, al-Shawkānī and al-Marāghī discuss spiritual versus bodily return; Mawdūdī develops several differing conceptions of an afterlife. ↩
-
Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:179; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:292–10:293. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6, second answer: الصانع المختار, a Creator acting by choice, versus the claim that إعادة المعدوم, restoring what has ceased to exist, is intrinsically impossible. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10–11. ↩
-
Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411–4:412; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wajīz, 1165. ↩
-
Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411–4:412; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:388; Al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386; Al-Samʿānī, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 6:135; Al-Samarqandī, Baḥr al-ʿulūm, 3:536; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:396; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:246; Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:389–10:390; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:192; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wajīz, 1165.
Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wasīṭ uses these labels to support the Qurʾān interpretation; his al-Basīṭ distinguishes that construction from believers versus deniers. Ibn al-Jawzī, al-Khāzin, al-Samʿānī, al-Samarqandī, al-Darrah and Muḥammad al-Hilāl relate the kind of disagreement to the proposed referent. Al-Māturīdī, Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Biqāʿī and Ibn ʿĀshūr retain differing accusations within their wider explanations. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wajīz, by contrast, explains the news as resurrection and verse 3 through their failure to believe. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:6; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:245–12:246; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:172; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp. 313–314; Al-Thalabī, Al-Kashf wa-l-bayān, 28:304; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:8–30:9. Ṣalāḥ b. Sālim BāʿUthmān discusses the objection and its answer in his note to al-Thaʿlabī, 28:304. Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, p.9, English edition. Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429–6:430.
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah and Ibn Juzayy distinguish the all-people construction from the Quraysh construction. Abū Ḥayyān reports an all-world audience with believers affirming and unbelievers denying. Al-Nīsābūrī reports the mixed-intention construction. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Nasafī, al-Bayḍāwī, al-Rāzī and Muḥammad al-Hilāl preserve broader alternatives. Al-Maẓharī and al-Kūrānī restrict rebuke to the mocking or denying side. Quṭb distinguishes the wider disagreement from the denier-only questioning addressed by the opening. Ṣalāḥ b. Sālim BāʿUthmān, annotating al-Thaʿlabī, raises the all-deniers objection and answers it through a mixed audience. Al-Zuḥaylī includes contrasting assent and certainty. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423, the alternatives of the wider world and Quraysh. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:390; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. He prefers the first explanation, deniers and doubters: والمعول عليه الأول, “The first is the account relied upon.” ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85. ↩
-
Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438–439; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:37. ↩
-
Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171–10:172; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, pp. 313–314. ↩
-
Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, p.9, English edition. For the contrary ruling: Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl Bāshā, 9:37; al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:439. ↩
-
Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:37; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438–439; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203.
Ibn Kamāl and Abū al-Suʿūd reject the mixed-audience explanation on this ground. Al-Shawkānī first records it, then rejects it when interpreting kallā. Al-Ālūsī records wider alternatives but prefers deniers and doubters. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85. His paired forms are الاستباق والتسابق (istibāq/tasābuq) and الانتضال والتناضل (intiḍāl/tanāḍul), examples of the related formations. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85, his final preferred account after the preliminary alternatives. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203, quoting Abū al-Suʿūd as the Ottoman mufti, then giving his own objection. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203.
Abū al-Suʿūd prefers this account after discussing alternatives. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī also records it. Al-Ālūsī objects that it departs from the apparent wording and finds its reasoning problematic. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11, on the nominal relative clause. The participle describes their continuing disagreement; its participants and purpose are explained from the context. ↩
-
Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:429; Al-Ṭībī, Futūḥ al-ghayb, 16:243; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:292. Al-Ṭībī introduces the emphasis explanation as a reported view. The emphasis concerns Quraysh’s particular opposition to this announcement. ↩
Q5. What does *kallā* reject or affirm?
-
Qurʾān 78:4, Saheeh International, Quran.com translation. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11, on the inference from rejecting denial to affirming occurrence. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113–23:114; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:388; Al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386; Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170; Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:180; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:6; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:8, 10. Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, note 2, English translation; Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:683, commentary.
Al-Ṭabarī, al-Baghawī and al-Wāḥidī negate the opponents’ claim; Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Khāzin preserve rebuke and the “not as they claim” explanation. Al-Qurṭubī distinguishes rejecting denial of resurrection from rejecting denial of revelation. Al-Nasafī (al-Taysīr) states the contrast between their false claim and the truth. Ibn ʿĀshūr develops the inference to the event’s occurrence. Al-Marāghī, al-Zuḥaylī, Mawdūdī and Maʿāriful Qurʾān likewise explain rejection of the false claim. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684. Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611, classifies kallā as a particle of restraint and rebuke, radʿ wa-zajr. ↩
-
Al-Qaffāl, quoted by al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7. Al-Qaffāl calls rejection of what precedes the more apparent Arabic usage; al-Rāzī then records “truly” as an alternative and develops the renewed warning. ↩
-
Al-Wāḥidī, al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113–114; al-Wasīṭ, 4:412; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7984–7985, reporting Nuṣayr’s explanation and Abū Ḥātim’s rejection of it. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. Islamic Research Academy, al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1744.
Abū al-Suʿūd and the Islamic Research Academy’s al-Wasīṭ adopt this extension; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī records the corresponding opposition explanation. Al-Ālūsī records an objection: the relative clause is not independently asserted, so making it a separate target of rebuke is less immediate. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203, the objection introduced after the alternative target of rebuke. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7984–12:7985; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:94; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:246; Al-Suyūṭī, Muʿtarak al-aqrān, 2:249; Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 3:427–3:428.
Al-Qurṭubī and Makkī preserve both alternatives. Al-Rāzī, Ibn ʿĀdil, al-Shawkānī and Muḥammad al-Hilāl report “truly” alongside rebuke. Al-Suyūṭī transmits “truly” from al-Kisāʾī and introductory alā from Abū Ḥātim. Al-Samīn reports an introductory classification for both al-Nabaʾ warnings, then argues instead for rebuke. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170. Al-Suyūṭī attributes ḥaqqan to al-Kisāʾī and introductory alā to Abū Ḥātim in Muʿtarak al-aqrān, 2:249. The English phrases here explain the alternative meanings. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170, the respective stopping and beginning constructions. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:424; Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:37; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:172; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, p. 314; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:249; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:397; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:94; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438; Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; Maḥmūd al-Ṣāfī, Al-Jadwal fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 15:213–15:214; Muḥyī al-Dīn al-Darwīsh, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān wa-bayānuhu, 10:351; Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, 725; Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 3:427–3:428. Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, sixth edition (1341 AH), p.3. Al-Rāghib explains the particle’s general function in Arabic.
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Nasafī, al-Bayḍāwī, Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Ibn Juzayy, Ibn Kamāl, al-Qāsimī, al-Maẓharī, al-Kūrānī, Ṭanṭāwī, al-Darrah and Muḥammad ʿAbduh explain rebuke. Al-Rāzī transmits al-Qaffāl’s statement that rebuke is the more apparent function in Arabic usage; Ibn ʿĀdil transmits that account. Al-Shawkānī gives rebuke and reports “truly” as an alternative. Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, al-Ṣāfī and al-Darwīsh classify both occurrences as rebuking. Al-Rāghib gives the lexical rebuking function; al-Samīn ultimately argues for it across the occurrences he discusses. ↩
-
Abū Bakr al-Jazāʾirī, Aysar al-tafāsīr, 5:501; Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611. Aysar al-tafāsīr, notes 2 and 3. Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:682–683, English translation and commentary. ↩
-
Abū Bakr al-Jazāʾirī, Aysar al-tafāsīr, 5:501. Aysar al-tafāsīr, notes 2 and 3, distinguishes the two occurrences. Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, English translation, 8:682–683, translation and commentary. The translation and the explanatory discussion have different functions here.
The explanatory notes in al-Jazāʾirī’s Aysar al-tafāsīr call the first a rebuke and the second “truly.” The English translation in Maʿāriful Qurʾān uses “Truly,” while its commentary explains the negative sense. ↩
-
Ibn Hishām, Mughnī al-labīb, pp. 249–251; quoted by al-Suyūṭī in Muʿtarak al-aqrān, 2:249. The account first attributes the exclusively rebuking sense to Sībawayh and most authorities, then records the objections and additional proposed functions. The examples, poetry and their source details are given in Iʿrāb: Grammatical Analysis, note 17. ↩
-
Makkī, quoted by al-Suyūṭī in al-Itqān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:302–303. The second al-Nabaʾ occurrence is expressly named in group three; the first belongs to the eighteen remaining occurrences in group four. The restriction applies specifically to stopping on or beginning with kallā. For the differing judgments: al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:369; Thaʿlab, quoted in Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:231. Makkī’s phrase is “not good,” not a prohibition. ↩
Q6. What will they come to know?
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203–204. Qurʾānic translation: Saheeh International, 78:4. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7–8; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589–590; Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170–171; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:94–95; Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:430; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wajīz, p.1165; Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:179; Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:494; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, pp.25–26; Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, p.3; Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, notes 2–3.
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Rāzī, al-Nasafī (Madārik), Ibn ʿĀdil and al-Nīsābūrī explain the truth becoming evident. Al-Qurṭubī includes the truth of Muḥammad’s Qurʾān and resurrection message. Al-Wāḥidī’s al-Wajīz, al-Nasafī’s al-Taysīr and Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī also give recognition of the truth. Ibn ʿUthaymīn emphasizes the messengers being proved truthful; Muḥammad ʿAbduh and Mawdūdī explain the future encounter. ↩
-
Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113–114, and Al-Wasīṭ, 4:411–412; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:388–389; Al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386–387; Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 3:126; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:246; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:8, 10, 12; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:396–397; Al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-karīm al-raḥmān, p.906.
Al-Baghawī, al-Wāḥidī in al-Basīṭ and al-Wasīṭ, Ibn al-Jawzī, al-Khāzin, Ibn Fūrak, al-Zuḥaylī and al-Darrah explain consequences. Al-Wāḥidī reports al-Ḍaḥḥāk’s division between unbelievers and believers, but prefers renewed threat. Al-Saʿdī emphasizes directly seeing punishment. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–86. He distinguishes this threatening context from the declaration that deniers will know their falsehood in 16:38–39. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–86; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203–204; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1744–1745.
Abū al-Suʿūd selects calamities and punishments. Al-Ālūsī adopts that explanation and accepts recompense for their questioning as equivalent; he reports, without adopting, recognition accompanied by shame. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī also gives the fuller punishment explanation. The Academy’s al-Wasīṭ records punishment and recognition-with-shame. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12; Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7–8; Al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-karīm al-raḥmān, p.906; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:6–7; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388–389. Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:494; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:246.
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Ṣābūnī and Muḥammad al-Hilāl explicitly include both. Al-Ṭabarī joins what Allah does with them to their recognition of former error; al-Marāghī joins the denied event with questioning and judgment. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12; Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7–8. ↩
-
Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388–389, drawing upon al-ʿInāyah.
Al-Qāsimī, drawing upon al-ʿInāyah, gives alternatives rather than explicitly combining them as Ibn ʿĀshūr does. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt Ahl al-Sunna, 10:397–398. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204; Al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:396–397. ↩
-
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, Dār al-Fikr edition, 8:408–409; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn, Al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, pp.25–26, citing 7:53. ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:193–194; Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:683–684; Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, pp.3–5; Al-Qurʾān: Tadabbur wa-ʿAmal, Qurʾān page 582, third reflection, quoting Ibn Juzayy on the creative-power proof. Ibn Juzayy, al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt Ahl al-Sunna, 10:391; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, 8:408–409. ↩
-
Al-Bukhārī, al-Ṣaḥīḥ, al-Sulṭāniyyah printing, no.1379 (2:99–100), Book of Funerals, chapter on the deceased being shown his place morning and evening, from ʿAbd Allāh ibn ʿUmar رضي الله عنهما through Nāfiʿ and Mālik. ↩
-
Al-Tirmidhī, al-Jāmiʿ, ed. Bashshār ʿAwwād Maʿrūf, no.2460, 4:247–248, from Abū Saʿīd al-Khudrī رضي الله عنه; he calls it gharīb and says he knows it only through this isnad. Al-Albānī grades the report ḍaʿīf jiddan, very weak, in Ḍaʿīf Sunan al-Tirmidhī (al-Maktab al-Islāmī, 1411 AH), no.437, pp.279–280, distinguishing its authentic opening exhortation to remember death from the rest. Al-ʿIrāqī identifies ʿUbayd Allāh b. al-Walīd al-Waṣṣāfī as weak (al-Mughnī ʿan ḥaml al-asfār, p.358). Al-Risālah’s editorial office identifies both al-Waṣṣāfī and ʿAṭiyyah al-ʿAwfī as weak in its edition of al-Jāmiʿ, no.2628, 4:451–452. Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12, calls the preceding Ibn ʿUmar hadith authentic, not this report. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–86; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12; Al-Zarkashī, Al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 4:280–283. Ibn Mālik compares uses of sa- and sawfa for the same future; al-Zarkashī disputes that the examples must refer to the same event and distinguishes threatening speech from a bare future statement. The suggested worldly/otherworldly distinction in that reply is a possible explanation, not a fixed allocation of the two al-Nabaʾ warnings. ↩
Q7. Why is the warning repeated, and what does *thumma* add?
-
Qurʾān 78:4–5, Saheeh International, Quran.com translation. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7–8; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7–8; al-Wāḥidī, al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113–114. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:7–24:8; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-ʿaẓīm, 8:302; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Thalabī, Al-Kashf wa-l-bayān, 28:304–28:305; Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:388; Ibn Juzayy, Al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384; Muḥammad ʿAlī Ṭāhā al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:396–10:397; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wajīz, 1165; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113–23:114; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Wasīṭ, 4:412; Muqātil b. Sulaymān, Tafsīr Muqātil, 4:558; Al-Marāghī, Tafsīr al-Marāghī, 30:6; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:8–30:10; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:248–15:249; Al-Saʿdī, Taysīr al-Karīm al-Raḥmān, 906. Al-Ṣābūnī, Ṣafwat al-tafāsīr, 3:494, main text. Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:683, English edition.
Al-Ṭabarī, Ibn Kathīr, al-Baghawī, al-Thalabī, Ibn al-Jawzī, Ibn Juzayy, Abū Ḥayyān and al-Darrah explain renewed warning. All three al-Wāḥidī works give reinforcement; al-Basīṭ explicitly prefers it over the two-audience account. Muqātil’s second warning is warning after warning, although he connects the first with Badr. Al-Marāghī, al-Zuḥaylī, al-Ṣābūnī, Ṭanṭāwī and Maʿāriful Qurʾān also explain reinforcement. Al-Saʿdī treats both warnings together as knowledge through punishment, not two assigned dates. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Al-Nasafī, Madārik al-tanzīl, 3:589; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7–31:8; Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–9:86; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:38; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, p. 314; Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:430; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:389; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1744–10:1745; Wahbah al-Zuḥaylī, Al-Tafsīr al-munīr, 30:10; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:249.
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Nasafī, al-Rāzī, al-Bayḍāwī, Abū al-Suʿūd, Ibn Kamāl, al-Kūrānī and Ibn ʿĀshūr develop the stronger second warning. Al-Ālūsī reports this explanation; al-Nīsābūrī transmits it from the scholars of meanings. Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī explicitly prefers rank while reporting temporal alternatives. Al-Qāsimī transmits the explanation from al-ʿInāyah. The Academy’s al-Wasīṭ, al-Zuḥaylī and Ṭanṭāwī likewise explain escalation. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12. ↩
-
Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 3:8–13, on repetition and renewed warning; 3:20, on differentiated kinds of knowing in the al-Takāthur comparison. ↩
-
Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:193–21:194; Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–30:12; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:249; Al-Zarkashī, Al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 3:8–3:20; ʿAbd al-Raḥmān Ḥabannakah al-Maydānī, Al-Balāghah al-ʿArabiyyah, 2:71–2:76; Al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, ʿAṭāʾāt al-ʿIlm edition, 7:335–7:336. Mawdūdī, Tafhīm al-Qurʾān, al-Nabaʾ, notes 1–3, English translation; Sayyid Quṭb, In the Shade of the Qurʾān, pp.9–13, English edition; Muḥammad Shafīʿ, Maʿāriful Qurʾān, 8:682–685, English edition. Muḥammad ʿAbduh, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, sixth edition (1341 AH), pp.3–5. Al-Shinqīṭī, Al-ʿAdhb al-namīr, 4:383, on al-Aʿrāf 7:187, with al-Nabaʾ as the comparison for reinforcement.
Abū Ḥayyān, al-Biqāʿī, al-Qāsimī, Ibn ʿĀshūr and Ṭanṭāwī explain the withheld object. Quṭb develops the terror of the unspecified answer; Mawdūdī, Muftī Muḥammad Shafīʿ and Muḥammad ʿAbduh connect present dispute with unavoidable disclosure. Al-Zarkashī and al-Maydānī explain renewed warnings in their rhetorical studies. Al-Shinqīṭī’s original Aḍwāʾ uses these verses as a warning parallel elsewhere; the direct al-Nabaʾ continuation belongs to ʿAṭiyyah Sālim. In al-ʿAdhb al-namīr, al-Shinqīṭī also prefers reinforcement for the knowing clauses of al-Aʿrāf and cites al-Nabaʾ by analogy; he does not assign two dates here. ↩
-
Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26. ↩
-
ʿAbd al-Raḥmān Ḥabannakah al-Maydānī, Al-Balāghah al-ʿArabiyyah, 2:71–2:76. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, ed. ʿAbd Allāh al-Turkī, 24:8, transmits this interpretation through Ibn Ḥumayd, Mihrān, Abū Sinān and Thābit, from al-Ḍaḥḥāk. Muḥammad b. Ḥumayd al-Rāzī was sharply disputed. Ibn Maʿīn called him trustworthy and said that the troubling reports came from his teachers rather than from him. Aḥmad praised his knowledge and judged his reports from Ibn al-Mubārak and Jarīr sound; concerning his reports from the scholars of Rayy, he said that Ibn Ḥumayd knew them better. Against this, al-Bukhārī said that his hadith was open to question; al-Nasāʾī called him untrustworthy and, in another judgment, a liar, as did Ibn Wārah. Ibn Ḥajar records Abū Ḥātim’s earlier transmission from him and later abandonment of him. Ibn Khuzaymah answered the appeal to Aḥmad’s praise by saying that Aḥmad had not known him as they did and would not have praised him had he done so. Ibn Ḥajar, Tahdhīb al-tahdhīb, Indian printing, 9:127–131. These judgments leave the attribution to al-Ḍaḥḥāk disputed. Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:8; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8. Al-Ṭabarī says that al-Ḍaḥḥāk recited it thus, without spelling out the person changes. ʿAbd Allāh b. ʿAbd al-Muḥsin al-Turkī cites Abū Ḥayyān for tāʾ in the first warning, addressing “you,” and yāʾ in the second, referring to “they.” Al-Turkī also records the omission of a passage in some manuscripts. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:171; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. ↩
-
Al-Wāḥidī, al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:114; al-Samʿānī, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 6:135–136. ↩
-
Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:438–5:439; Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:179–15:180. The correction is by Māhir Adīb Ḥabbūsh and Jamāl ʿAbd al-Raḥīm al-Fāris, 15:180, citing al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:8. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423–5:424; Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–10:384. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah’s last allocation is unnamed in the printed text; its ordering differs from Abū Ḥayyān’s al-Ḍaḥḥāk attribution. Ibn Mujāhid, al-Sabʿah, p. 668; Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 2:397–398. Al-Nashr records no difference here among the ten; its transmitted routes retain yāʾ in both verses. ↩
-
Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:8; Al-Baghawī, Maʿālim al-tanzīl, 5:199; Al-Thalabī, Al-Kashf wa-l-bayān, 28:304–28:305; Al-Māwardī, Al-Nukat wa-l-ʿuyūn, 6:183; Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8; Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, 3:126; Al-Qurṭubī, Al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170–19:171; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:424; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:95; Al-Suyūṭī, Al-Durr al-manthūr, 8:390; A group of researchers, Mawsūʿat al-tafsīr al-maʾthūr, 22:596–22:597; Al-Khāzin, Lubāb al-taʾwīl, 4:386–4:387; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:439; Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:180; Al-Samʿānī, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān, 6:135; Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:113–23:114; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7984–12:7986. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:430.
The deniers-then-believers interpretation ascribed to al-Ḍaḥḥāk is reported by al-Ṭabarī, al-Baghawī, al-Thalabī, al-Māwardī, al-Rāzī, Ibn Fūrak, al-Qurṭubī, Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Ibn ʿĀdil, Makkī, al-Suyūṭī and the Mawsūʿah. Al-Khāzin gives the allocation without naming him. Al-Nīsābūrī also records deniers then believers as an alternative. Al-Qurṭubī and al-Shawkānī also report the reverse. Al-Nasafī gives the reverse order to al-Ḍaḥḥāk; Māhir Adīb Ḥabbūsh and Jamāl ʿAbd al-Raḥīm al-Fāris correct his attribution from al-Ṭabarī’s report. Al-Samʿānī favours both warnings to deniers; al-Wāḥidī favours renewed threat; al-Shawkānī rejects including believers under the rebuke. Al-Ālūsī records and questions broader allocations. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8. The passage identifies this speaker only by the title “al-Qāḍī.”
Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:95, gives al-Qāḍī’s explanation differently: «سيعلمون معنى العذاب إذا شاهدوه», knowing “the meaning of punishment when they witness it,” followed by «سيعلمون العذاب», knowing “punishment.” This wording does not distinguish the two experiences as clearly as al-Rāzī’s gathering-and-reckoning followed by punishment. ↩
-
Al-Nasafī, Al-Taysīr fī al-tafsīr, 15:180. He gives punishment followed by recognition of its permanence beside resurrection followed by what Allah does with them, and worldly punishment followed by otherworldly punishment, without selecting one exclusive allocation. ↩
-
The distinction between what Allah does with them and their recognition of former error is an unnamed alternative recorded by al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8. Resurrection followed by punishment in Hell for denying resurrection is an alternative recorded by al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. Al-Māwardī attributes “a warning after a warning” to al-Ḥasan, then explains punishment at resurrection followed by punishment in Hell: al-Nukat wa-l-ʿuyūn, 6:183. Al-Suyūṭī attributes al-Ḥasan’s words to Ibn al-Mundhir, without reproducing their chain: al-Durr al-manthūr, 8:390; Mawsūʿat al-tafsīr al-maʾthūr, 22:596. Their attribution to al-Ḥasan remains unverified; the explanation given here is al-Māwardī’s.
Ibn Fūrak, Tafsīr Ibn Fūrak, 3:126, gives Judgment torment followed by Hell torment anonymously. Al-Māwardī presents that sequence as his explanation of renewed warning, not as a separately established wording from al-Ḥasan. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. He records the proposal with reservations. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt Ahl al-Sunna, 10:391: علم دلالة, knowledge by indication or demonstration, and علم المشاهدة والعيان, knowledge through direct witnessing. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–9:86; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203–15:204. ↩
-
ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, Dār al-Fikr edition, 8:408–8:409. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:397–10:398; Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203–15:204. ↩
-
Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:391; Al-Māturīdī, Taʾwīlāt ahl al-sunnah, 10:397–10:398; ʿAṭiyyah Sālim, continuation of al-Shinqīṭī, Aḍwāʾ al-bayān, Dār al-Fikr edition, 8:408–8:409; Ḥikmat Bashīr Yāsīn, Al-Ṣaḥīḥ al-masbūr, 4:581; Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26.
Al-Māturīdī offers proof then sight as a two-stage explanation, and later conditionally allows a promise of understanding for sincere inquiry. ʿAṭiyyah Sālim explains demonstration now and witnessing on the Day without fixing one verse to each stage; Ḥikmat Yāsīn quotes his explanation. Ibn ʿUthaymīn describes certain witnessing on Judgment. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. He places the first encounter عند النزع وخروج الروح, “at the taking and departure of the soul”: the angels’ rebuke and the distress of dying accompany انكشاف الغطاء, “removal of the covering.” The second is في القيامة, “at the Resurrection,” with the angels of punishment and severe punishment. He records this allocation beside renewed warning; an interval in time can also bring an increase in severity. ↩
-
Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:8; Muqātil, al-Tafsīr, 4:558. Muqātil’s parallel is the repeated warning in al-Takāthur 102:3–4, as ʿAbd Allāh Maḥmūd Shiḥāta explains in his note.
Al-Rāzī records worldly punishment followed by otherworldly punishment, with Badr as an example of the first. Muqātil connects verse 4 with the deniers’ being killed at Badr and the angels taking the wrongdoers, striking their faces and backs. He explains verse 5 as warning after warning, not as a second named event; his Badr explanation therefore does not by itself give the complete worldly-then-otherworldly allocation. ↩
-
Abū Bakr al-Jazāʾirī, Aysar al-tafāsīr, 5:500–501; al-Maẓharī, al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:172. Al-Jazāʾirī adopts death followed by rising from graves and gathering to Hell: the consequence of denial becomes known when souls are taken, then belief at the gathering cannot benefit. Al-Maẓharī’s conclusion instead assigns the grave and what follows resurrection, combining two fulfilments with the greater severity of the second. ↩
-
Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:38, ed. Māhir Ḥabbūsh; al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:86; al-Samarqandī, Baḥr al-ʿulūm, 3:536–537. Ḥabbūsh records القبر, “the grave,” in manuscript ʿayn, and identifies his established text with al-Bayḍāwī and Abū al-Suʿūd, who have القيامة, “the Resurrection.” “The grave” nevertheless appears in the cited passage as well as in the variant note. These conflicting indications do not establish a different interpretation held by Ibn Kamāl.
Ibn Kamāl also reports resurrection followed by recompense. The dying-then-grave wording occurs in the variant just described; al-Bayḍāwī and Abū al-Suʿūd report death-pangs followed by Judgment. Al-Samarqandī mentions death and the Hereafter together without assigning one occasion to each verse. ↩
-
Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:193–21:194. He contrasts the believer’s willing submission with the unbeliever’s abasement, and points to calamities that humbled the opponents before long as a fulfilment of the warning. His account combines knowledge before and after death with the second warning’s higher force. ↩
-
Al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:86; Al-Kūrānī, Ghāyat al-amānī, p. 314; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:38; Muḥammad al-Hilāl, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-tharī al-jāmiʿ, 12:246–12:247; Abū Bakr al-Jazāʾirī, Aysar al-tafāsīr, 5:501; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:172; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:193–21:194; Al-Shawkānī, Fatḥ al-qadīr, 5:439; Islamic Research Academy, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1744–10:1745; Al-Samarqandī, Baḥr al-ʿulūm, 3:536–3:537. Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:430.
Al-Bayḍāwī, Abū al-Suʿūd, al-Kūrānī and Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī report death-pangs then Judgment, or resurrection then recompense. Ibn Kamāl reports resurrection then recompense; Māhir Ḥabbūsh records “the grave” as a variant in the other pairing and identifies the established text with al-Bayḍāwī’s and Abū al-Suʿūd’s “the Resurrection.” Muḥammad al-Hilāl develops temporal succession. Al-Nīsābūrī records worldly then otherworldly knowledge as an alternative. Al-Jazāʾirī assigns death then rising and gathering; al-Maẓharī’s explicit conclusion assigns the grave then after resurrection. Al-Biqāʿī combines higher rank with knowledge before and after death. Al-Shawkānī and the Academy’s al-Wasīṭ preserve death then resurrection as an alternative. Al-Samarqandī mentions death and the Hereafter but does not explicitly distribute the two verses between them. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. ↩
-
Al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:430. ↩
-
Ibn al-Qayyim, collected al-Tafsīr al-Qayyim, p.578, commentary on al-Takāthur. He attributes the death/grave explanation to al-Ḥasan and Muqātil and reports it from Ibn ʿAbbās رضي الله عنهما through ʿAṭāʾ, but gives neither a complete chain nor a fuller identification of ʿAṭāʾ. The attribution to Ibn ʿAbbās remains unverified. ↩
-
Al-Tirmidhī, al-Jāmiʿ, ed. Bashshār ʿAwwād Maʿrūf, no.3355, 5:374, from ʿAlī رضي الله عنه; he calls it gharīb. Al-Albānī grades its isnad weak in Ḍaʿīf Sunan al-Tirmidhī (al-Maktab al-Islāmī, 1411 AH), no.665, p.438. Al-Risālah’s editorial office, al-Jāmiʿ, no.3649, 5:543, identifies the defect: al-Ḥajjāj b. Arṭāt is a mudallis, a narrator who sometimes omits an intermediary, and here uses عن, “from,” without declaring direct hearing. The isnad is al-Ḥajjāj, from al-Minhāl b. ʿAmr, from Zirr b. Ḥubaysh, from ʿAlī. Abū Kurayb also narrates it through Ibn Abī Laylā in place of al-Ḥajjāj; al-Risālah’s editorial office notes Ibn Abī Laylā’s poor memory. Ibn al-Qayyim’s collected al-Tafsīr al-Qayyim, p.578, misprints the linking “from” as “son of.” Its adjacent quotation from al-Wāḥidī places the first knowledge in the grave, unlike the death/grave allocation. ↩
-
Ibn al-Qayyim, collected al-Tafsīr al-Qayyim, p.578, fifth reason. The added description in 102:7 is translated by Saheeh International as “the eye of certainty”; see Quran.com’s translation of al-Takāthur. ↩
-
Ibn al-Qayyim, Al-Tafsīr al-qayyim, 578–579; Al-Zarkashī, Al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 3:20.
Ibn al-Qayyim prefers death then grave for al-Takāthur after recording confirmation with al-Nabaʾ as a parallel. Al-Zarkashī distinguishes kinds of knowing in his al-Takāthur comparison because conditions in worldly life, the state after death and the final gathering differ; where succession is not temporal, he allows an increase in rank. Their arguments do not establish those two dates for al-Nabaʾ. ↩
Iʿrāb: Grammatical Analysis
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611. Maḥmūd Ṣāfī, al-Jadwal fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 15:213–214, gives the same principal word and clause relationships. ↩
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; Ṣāfī, al-Jadwal, 15:213–214. The understood verb belongs to the grammatical explanation of verse 2. ↩
-
Al-Zajjāj, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān wa-iʿrābuhu, 5:271 and 1:427–428; Makkī b. Abī Ṭālib, Mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:794; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84. Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 12:428 and 15:471–474, preserves Ibn Barrī’s restriction to interrogative mā governed by a preposition. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:7. ↩
-
Ṣāfī, al-Jadwal, 15:214, attributing the poetry to al-Kumayt b. Zayd. ↩
-
Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:647; Ṣāfī, al-Jadwal, 15:214. The Arabic above follows al-Samīn. Ṣāfī attributes the poetry to Ḥassān and prints ليئم. Muḥammad ʿIlyān al-Marzūqī’s marginal discussion accompanying al-Zamakhsharī’s al-Kashshāf, 4:683, gives Ibn al-Mundhir and Ibn Thābit as alternative attributions and دمان as a variant of رماد. The note of ʿAlī al-Najdī Nāṣif, ʿAbd al-Ḥalīm al-Najjār and ʿAbd al-Fattāḥ Ismāʿīl Shalabī to Ibn Jinnī’s al-Muḥtasab, 2:347, prefers رماد because the poem rhymes in dāl. The grammatical point rests on على ما, irrespective of the rhyme variant. ↩
-
Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 2:292; al-Harawī, quoted by al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 4:403. Al-Farrāʾ says that al-Mufaḍḍal recited the poetry to him; he does not name its poet. His text reads القيل, “talk”; the note records القتل, “killing,” in another manuscript and regards that as a corruption. ↩
-
Ṣāfī, al-Jadwal, 15:214; Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:471–474. ↩
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; al-Samīn, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:647–648; Makkī, Mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:794; al-ʿUkbarī, al-Tibyān fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:1266; Aḥmad al-Kharrāṭ, al-Mujtabā min mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 4:1407. Al-Samīn reports the “why” construction from Ibn ʿAṭiyyah. Muḥyī al-Dīn Darwīsh calls the explanatory relationship عطف بيان نحوي, ʿaṭf bayān naḥwī, in Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān wa-bayānuhu, 10:351. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7. Ibn Juzayy, al-Tashīl, 2:444, Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād, 9:85, and al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203, prefer the answering construction on grounds of eloquence. ↩
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; al-Samīn, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:647–648; Makkī, Mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:794; al-ʿUkbarī, al-Tibyān fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:1266; Aḥmad al-Kharrāṭ, al-Mujtabā min mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 4:1407. Al-Samīn reports the “why” construction from Ibn ʿAṭiyyah. Muḥyī al-Dīn Darwīsh calls the explanatory relationship عطف بيان نحوي, ʿaṭf bayān naḥwī, in Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān wa-bayānuhu, 10:351. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:7. Ibn Juzayy, al-Tashīl, 2:444, Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād, 9:85, and al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203, prefer the answering construction on grounds of eloquence. ↩
-
Makkī, al-Hidāyah ilā bulūgh al-nihāyah, 12:7981–7983. Al-Samīn, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:647–648, separately records al-Zamakhsharī’s two explanations of the reported hāʾ: an actual stop after ʿammah, or treating connected recitation like a pause. Reader and transmission assignments are examined in Qirāʾāt. ↩
-
Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:221. He gives the question to Muḥammad ﷺ followed by an understood answering verb, and compares al-Mursalāt 77:12–13. This is a construction he permits, not an exclusive preference over every alternative. ↩
-
Al-Wāḥidī, Al-Tafsīr al-basīṭ, 23:109–23:111; Al-Maẓharī, Al-Tafsīr al-Maẓharī, 10:171. ↩
-
Al-Bāqūlī, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:580; Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:221; Al-Ṭībī, Futūḥ al-ghayb, 16:242–16:243. Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. ↩
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; al-Samīn, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:648. Al-ʿUkbarī, al-Tibyān, 2:1266, permits the three cases without spelling out the understood words given by Dār al-Ṣaḥābah. ↩
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611. ↩
-
Makkī, al-Hidāyah, 12:7983–7985; al-Samīn, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ fī tafsīr ashraf al-alfāẓ, 3:427–428. Al-Samīn reports introductory and affirmative explanations but concludes that restraint and rebuke can account for the cited occurrences.
Does rebuke explain every occurrence?
Does a clear rebuke here mean that kallā must rebuke in every passage? A single function can be retained if the context gives something to reject. In al-Fajr, for example, a person mistakes wealth for proof of honour and deprivation for proof of humiliation. The rebuke corrects that mistaken judgment of his standing before Allah. Al-Samīn argues that the other occurrences can likewise be understood through their contexts. This is his preferred conclusion, after reporting a fourfold classification: rebuke, an introductory particle, “truly,” and “it is not so.” The reported introductory category includes both warnings in al-Nabaʾ; his own conclusion favours restraint and rebuke.
Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 3:427–428. He records the fourfold classification, then concludes: والتحقيق أنها ردع وزجر, “The correct account is that it rebukes and restrains.” Its reported “truly” category, illustrated by al-Maʿārij 70:14–15, permits stopping but not beginning at kallā. Its al-Nabaʾ examples belong to the separate introductory category. Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170, permits beginning at kallā on the “truly” meaning.
The objection to making rebuke universal is equally concrete. A rebuke normally has something to reject. Ibn Hishām asks what kallā rejects in these passages:
- After the account of human formation: فِىٓ أَىِّ صُورَةٍ مَّا شَآءَ رَكَّبَكَ, “In whatever form He willed has He assembled you” (82:8). The next verse begins كَلَّا, “No!” No denial of Allah’s forming the human being has just been quoted.
- After the account of standing before Allah: يَوْمَ يَقُومُ ٱلنَّاسُ لِرَبِّ ٱلْعَـٰلَمِينَ, “The Day when mankind will stand before the Lord of the worlds?” (83:6). Again, the next verse begins كَلَّا, “No!” Ibn Hishām asks why an unspoken denial must be assumed before the word can be understood.
- After the promise to explain revelation: ثُمَّ إِنَّ عَلَيْنَا بَيَانَهُۥ, “Then upon Us is its clarification [to you]” (75:19), is followed by كَلَّا, “No!” at the start of verse 20. The proposed explanation makes this a rebuke of haste. Yet the instruction about haste appears earlier: لَا تُحَرِّكْ بِهِۦ لِسَانَكَ لِتَعْجَلَ بِهِۦٓ, “Move not your tongue with it, [O Muḥammad], to hasten with it [i.e., recitation of the Qur’ān]” (75:16). Verses 17–19 intervene before kallā appears.
Proposing an unspoken denial can explain the first two examples, but Ibn Hishām considers it strained to assume that denial merely to preserve the rule. In the third, he questions reaching back across the intervening statements to the instruction about haste. He also points to the later revelation beginning at al-ʿAlaq 96:6, where kallā opens the new discourse. These are his reasons for questioning whether one backward-looking function explains every occurrence.
Ibn Hishām, Mughnī al-labīb, pp. 249–251; quoted by al-Suyūṭī in Muʿtarak al-aqrān, 2:249. The account first attributes the exclusively rebuking sense to Sībawayh and most authorities, then records the objections and additional proposed functions. Qurʾānic translations: Saheeh International, 82:8–9; 83:6–7; 75:16, 19–20.
The alternatives also differ in what they connect. An affirmative answer agrees with what has been said; a future marker points to what will follow. Al-Naḍr b. Shumayl proposes the former function, while the latter is attributed to al-Farrāʾ and Ibn Saʿdān in the wider discussion of the word. These proposals widen the linguistic possibilities. Choosing among them here still requires an explanation of the opponents’ denial and the warning that answers it; rebuke connects the two directly.
Al-Suyūṭī, Muʿtarak al-aqrān, 2:249–250. He reports the affirmative-answer proposal from al-Naḍr b. Shumayl and the future-marker proposal from al-Farrāʾ and Ibn Saʿdān through Abū Ḥayyān. Makkī says that on the meaning “truly” the word is a noun. The discussion then records كَلاًّ سيَكفرونَ بعبادتهم at Maryam 19:82, with tanwīn, an added final “n” sound, on kallā. The following words mean “they will deny their worship.” The proposed noun can be explained as a maṣdar, a noun naming the action or state, meaning exhaustion, or as a burden. Al-Zamakhsharī also permits the rebuking particle with tanwīn, comparing salāsilā. Abū Ḥayyān objects that the latter is a noun whose original eligibility for tanwīn can be restored for correspondence; this does not establish that a particle can receive it. Ibn Hishām answers that al-Zamakhsharī offered another construction: the tanwīn replaces an added verse-ending extension, and connected utterance retains the intention of a pause. The form under discussion concerns Maryam 19:82, not al-Nabaʾ.
The evidence from usage.
To test whether the proposed functions are established by usage, we can examine an exchange in which another word answers kallā. Ibn Barrī cites al-Jaʿdī:
فقلْنا لَهُمْ: خَلُّوا النِّساءَ لأَهْلِها فَقَالُوا لَنَا: كَلَّا فقلْنا لَهُمْ: بَلى
“We told them, ‘Leave the women to their people.’ They said to us, ‘No’; we said to them, ‘Yes indeed.’”
The decisive word is balā, “yes indeed.” It answers and overturns a negation. Its response therefore shows that kallā functions negatively here. The argument rests on the exchange between the two replies, not merely on an English translation of the first.
Ibn Barrī, quoted in Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 11:597. The poetry is attributed there to al-Jaʿdī. Both halves of the complete poetic witness are quoted.
The same discussion adds another poetic witness from the same poet:
قُرَيْش جِهازُ النَّاسِ حَيّاً ومَيِّتاً، فَمَنْ قَالَ كَلَّا، فالمُكذِّب أَكْذَبُ
“Quraysh are people’s provision, living and dead; whoever says ‘No,’ the denier is the greater liar.”
Here kallā denies the preceding assertion. The poet’s condemnation of the person saying it makes that negative response plain. Together the two examples establish the backward-looking negative use invoked in the argument for rebuke. They support that function without making it the only function the word can have.
Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 11:597, the second witness in Ibn Barrī’s discussion, introduced as another saying of the same poet.
Evidence offered for the introductory meaning admits another explanation. Abū Ḥātim cites a proverb and this poetry of al-Aʿshā:
كَلَّا زَعَمْتُمْ بأَنَّا لَا نُقاتِلُكُمْ، إِنَّا لأَمْثالِكُمْ، يَا قَوْمَنا، قُتُلُ
“No indeed! You claimed that we would not fight you; we are killers of the likes of you, our people.”
On the introductory account, kallā draws attention to the reply. But the reply also contradicts the claim that they would not fight. Ibn al-Anbārī therefore answers that ordinary negation explains the poetry: the claim is not as the opponents say. The proverb about an ass not fighting admits the same response. A witness that can be explained by negation does not force an introductory interpretation.
Abū Ḥātim’s proposal and Ibn al-Anbārī’s reply in Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:231. The proverb is كَلّا زَعَمْتَ العِيرُ لَا تُقاتلُ, “No indeed! You claimed the ass does not fight.” The verse is attributed to al-Aʿshā.
The same question arises in al-ʿAlaq 96:6:
كَلَّآ إِنَّ ٱلْإِنسَـٰنَ لَيَطْغَىٰٓ
“No! [But] indeed, man transgresses” (Saheeh International).
Abū Ḥātim takes kallā here as an introductory call to attention. Ibn al-Anbārī answers that it can instead affirm what follows, “Truly, man transgresses,” or reject an understood assumption, “No, the matter is not as you suppose.” His reply shows why this witness does not establish an introductory function by itself: the same wording admits an affirmative or negative explanation. In al-Nabaʾ the preceding questioning gives the negative explanation a stated context, so no unspoken denial has to be invented to make rebuke intelligible.
Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:231, Abū Ḥātim’s citation of 96:6 and Ibn al-Anbārī’s two replies.
For Makkī’s distinction between the two al-Nabaʾ occurrences, see Q5. What does *kallā* reject or affirm?, note 16. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, pp.580–582; Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 12:416–418. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib al-Iṣfahānī, Al-Mufradāt fī gharīb al-Qurʾān, pp.580–581, entry علم; Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; Muḥyī al-Dīn al-Darwīsh, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān wa-bayānuhu, 10:350–351; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:424. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:424; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–86; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12. See Q6 for the competing explanations of the unexpressed object. ↩
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; Ṣāfī, al-Jadwal, 15:214. ↩
-
Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:649. The Ibn Mālik named here is Jamāl al-Dīn. ↩
-
Ibn ʿUthaymīn, Tafsīr Juzʾ ʿAmma, 25–26; Al-Samīn al-Ḥalabī, Al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:648–10:649; Ibn ʿĀdil, Al-Lubāb fī ʿulūm al-Kitāb, 20:94–20:95; Muḥyī al-Dīn al-Darwīsh, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān wa-bayānuhu, 10:351; Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611; Maḥmūd al-Ṣāfī, Al-Jadwal fī iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 15:214; Aḥmad al-Kharrāṭ, Al-Mujtabā min mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 4:1407. Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12.
Ibn ʿUthaymīn explicitly denies technical tawkīd here while affirming semantic reinforcement. Al-Samīn and Ibn ʿĀdil preserve Jamāl al-Dīn Ibn Mālik’s allowance and the contrary grammatical judgment. Al-Darwīsh and Ibn ʿĀshūr, by contrast, explicitly classify the repeated clause as verbal emphasis despite the conjunction; al-Darwīsh explains that increased severity also makes the conjunction meaningful; Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, al-Ṣāfī and al-Kharrāṭ give the independent and conjoined clause structures. ↩
-
Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, 3:11–13. He names al-Naḥḥās, al-Zamakhsharī, al-Rāzī and ʿIzz al-Dīn as explaining the two commands in 59:18 as requiring the same matter. Badr al-Dīn b. Mālik’s allowance of a conjunction is distinguished from the proposed restriction inferred from his father’s wording. The quoted clauses of 59:18 and 2:83 follow Saheeh International.
Al-Zarkashī illustrates the distinction with the two commands to fear Allah in 59:18:
First command Intervening command Renewed command اتَّقُوا اللَّهَ, “fear Allah” وَلْتَنْظُرْ نَفْسٌ مَا قَدَّمَتْ لِغَدٍ, “And let every soul look to what it has put forth for tomorrow” وَاتَّقُوا اللَّهَ, “and fear Allah” The English excerpts are from Saheeh International. The conjunction and intervening command prevent a simple word-for-word grammatical repetition. Yet a renewed command can strengthen the same requirement. The objection is that the second “fear Allah” joins the intervening command to consider one’s deeds, not the first “fear Allah.”
Al-Zarkashī answers that coordination can reach an earlier clause across an intervening expression. In 2:83, لَا تَعْبُدُونَ إِلَّا اللَّهَ, “Do not worship except Allah,” is followed by the instruction وَبِالْوَالِدَيْنِ إِحْسَانًا, “and to parents do good,” and other recipients of kindness, before وَقُولُوا لِلنَّاسِ حُسْنًا, “And speak to people good [words]” (Saheeh International). He joins the command to speak back to the earlier prohibition, not merely to the intervening instruction about parents. Intervening words therefore do not, by themselves, settle the connection. ↩
Ṣarf: Roots and Morphology
-
Dār al-Ṣaḥābah, Iʿrāb al-Qurʾān al-Karīm, 4:2611, for the inflections; Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 1:162–164, 9:82–97, 11:318–319 and 12:409–417, for the relevant lexical forms; al-Zamakhsharī, Asās al-balāghah, 1:431 and 2:239–240. The pattern formulas show the root letters and additions in each actual word. ↩
-
Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 11:318–319; al-Rāghib, al-Mufradāt, pp.437–438; al-Samīn, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 2:160–162. These authorities distinguish informational questions, commonly with ʿan, from requests for something to be given. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:202: he reports the explanation and Imruʾ al-Qays’s poetry from “some verifying scholars,” then objects in his own voice to an unrestricted two-agent, intransitive-only rule. He also cites al-Baṭalyawsī’s criticism of that rule. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:84, citing al-Najm 53:55; translation: Saheeh International. Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388; Islamic Research Academy, al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 10:1743. Al-Qāsimī and the Academy also cite تَعَالَى اللَّهُ, “exalted is Allah,” as a further case in which multiple agents are impossible. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:7–8, attributes the witnesses to al-Nābighah and Ruwayshid b. Kathīr al-Ṭāʾī. Ruwayshid’s final word is الصَّوْتُ, with ḍamma, as in al-Anbārī, al-Inṣāf, 2:636, witness 479. The conflicting marks in Ibn ʿĀshūr’s text do not constitute a different established case ending. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:8–9. His proposed combination distinguishes the act of exchanging questions from the purpose for which the questions are asked. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:9–10; al-Rāghib, al-Mufradāt, p.573. ↩
-
Muḥammad Ḥasan Jabal, al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 3:1488; Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 4:355; al-Rāghib, al-Mufradāt, p.573. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib, al-Mufradāt, pp.293–296; al-Samīn, ʿUmdat al-ḥuffāẓ, 1:522–526; Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 2:213; Jabal, al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 1:599–601. ↩
-
Ibn Fāris, Muʿjam maqāyīs al-lughah, 4:109–111. He attributes the poetry to al-Khansāʾ; ʿAbd al-Salām Muḥammad Hārūn’s note cites her Dīwān, p.27. ↩
-
Jabal, al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 3:1511–1514. He quotes the definition of knowledge from Tāj al-ʿarūs and develops the connections with the landmark in his own explanation. ↩
-
Al-Rāghib, al-Mufradāt, pp.580–582; Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 12:416–418; Jabal, al-Muʿjam al-ishtiqāqī al-muʾaṣṣal, 3:1514–1515, quoting and endorsing Abū Ḥayyān’s distinction. ↩
Balāghah: Rhetorical Analysis
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:6–9. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:6. The different explanations of the opening question are compared in Q2, “Why does Allah ask?” ↩
-
Ibn Juzayy, al-Tashīl li-ʿulūm al-tanzīl, 2:444; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:6, 9; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5–7. See Q2 for the question-and-answer witness and the alternative constructions. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:10; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. Ibn ʿĀshūr also explains the nominal clause’s force, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11; the fronting explanation here follows the explicit wording of Abū al-Suʿūd and al-Ālūsī. ↩
-
Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12; Abū Ḥayyān, al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–384; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:424. Q6 develops the distinct explanations of the unstated object and the relevant reports. ↩
-
Abū Ḥayyān, Al-Baḥr al-muḥīṭ, 10:383–384; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:37–38; Sayyid Quṭb, Fī Ẓilāl al-Qurʾān, commentary on 78:1–5; Al-Biqāʿī, Naẓm al-durar, 21:193–194; Ibn ʿĀshūr, Al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:11–12; Muḥammad Sayyid Ṭanṭāwī, Al-Tafsīr al-wasīṭ, 15:248–249; Al-Darrah, Tafsīr al-Qurʾān al-Karīm wa-iʿrābuhu wa-bayānuhu, 10:396–397; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, Al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423–424.
Abū Ḥayyān, Ibn Kamāl and Quṭb emphasize the fearful force. Ibn Kamāl also reports recognition of the truth when punishment is seen.
Al-Biqāʿī explains breadth; Ibn ʿĀshūr includes both truth and punishment. Ṭanṭāwī joins breadth with severe, enduring punishment; al-Darrah explains brevity.
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah explains it through ستعرفون, “you will recognize.” ↩
-
Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:369. He attributes the distribution couplet to ʿAbd al-ʿAzīz al-Dīrīnī and explains the recurring word as threat, rebuke and rejection directed at Makkah’s tyrannical opponents. The couplet describes its revelation setting and location in the muṣḥaf; it is not an additional meaning assigned to the particle. ↩
-
Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād al-ʿaql al-salīm, 9:85–86; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203–204; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12. ↩
-
Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 4:282–283. He reports Ibn Mālik’s objections and then answers them; the possibility of distinct worldly and otherworldly benefits is his rebuttal, not an established allocation of the two verses. Qurʾān 4:146 and 175, excerpts from Saheeh International. ↩
-
Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, 4:280–283, reporting al-Ṭībī and Ibn Bābashādh. Al-Ṭībī’s own discussion, Futūḥ al-ghayb, 7:303, has لن, as does Bahāʾ al-Dīn al-Subkī, ʿArūs al-afrāḥ, 1:131. The إن and لو forms in al-Burhān are textual errors. Al-Subkī’s reply, repeated by al-Zarkashī, distinguishes confirming the promised event from confirming the promise. His example combining promise and threat is Qurʾān 5:54. He also quotes al-Zamakhsharī on the certainty of a promise and Sībawayh on fulfilment even when delayed. One example listed under sawfa is printed كلا سيعلمون, which actually contains sa-; that inconsistency does not change the particle in al-Nabaʾ. ↩
-
Fāḍil Ṣāliḥ al-Sāmarrāʾī, al-Taʿbīr al-Qurʾānī, pp.159–160. The explanation of the father’s response is al-Sāmarrāʾī’s inference from their differing experiences and wording. Qurʾān 12:91–92 and 97–98, excerpts from Saheeh International.
A comparison from Sūrat Yūsuf. Fāḍil al-Sāmarrāʾī shows how context can make delay meaningful. Yūsuf’s brothers acknowledge his superiority in 12:91; he forgives them and prays for their forgiveness without waiting to be asked. Their admission to their father in 12:97 is stronger: they ask him to seek forgiveness and explicitly acknowledge their fault. Their father answers with سَوْفَ أَسْتَغْفِرُ لَكُمْ رَبِّي, “I will ask forgiveness for you from my Lord” (12:98, Saheeh International).
The relevant differences can be seen in the words themselves:
Encounter Arabic wording Meaning in Saheeh International The brothers before Yūsuf, 12:91 وَإِنْ كُنَّا لَخَاطِئِينَ “and indeed, we have been sinners.” Yūsuf’s prayer, 12:92 يَغْفِرُ اللَّهُ لَكُمْ “May Allah forgive you” The brothers before their father, 12:97 اسْتَغْفِرْ لَنَا ذُنُوبَنَا إِنَّا كُنَّا خَاطِئِينَ “ask for us forgiveness of our sins; indeed, we have been sinners.” Before Yūsuf, the admission uses the lighter إِنْ (in); before their father it uses إِنَّا (innā, “indeed we”) and explicitly asks forgiveness of their sins. Yūsuf’s prayer has no future marker. Their father’s answer has sawfa.
Al-Sāmarrāʾī relates the difference to what each had suffered. Yūsuf has attained honour and responds generously; his father has endured grief, weakness and loss of sight. The brothers’ deeper remorse before their father corresponds to that injury. Al-Sāmarrāʾī understands sawfa as a promise of later prayer and connects the delay with the father’s deeper hurt. His argument depends on the two encounters and their different wording. It does not establish two dates for al-Nabaʾ, where the same prefix occurs twice. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Ibn ʿĀshūr, al-Taḥrīr wa-l-tanwīr, 30:12; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, 3:8–11. The broader comparison of reinforcement, renewed warning and differentiated knowing is developed in Q7. ↩
-
Al-Qāsimī, Maḥāsin al-taʾwīl, 9:388–9:389; Ismāʿīl Ḥaqqī, Rūḥ al-bayān, 10:293. ↩
Qirāʾāt
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr fī al-qirāʾāt al-ʿashr, 2:134–135; al-Bannā, Itḥāf fuḍalāʾ al-bashar, p.569; ʿAbd al-Fattāḥ al-Qāḍī, al-Budūr al-zāhirah, 1:335. Al-Qāḍī’s brief phrase gives khulf immediately after al-Bazzī; al-Nashr establishes variation for Yaʿqūb’s two transmissions too. Ibn al-Jazarī distinguishes al-Bazzī’s routes: al-Taysīr gives al-Fārisī’s chain, whereas al-Dānī learned the hāʾ form from Ibn Ghalbūn and read without it through al-Fārisī. He also identifies al-Mahdawī’s al-Hidāyah as alone extending the rule for ʿamma and lima generally to Ibn Kathīr. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 1:354–355, 430, 433. Muḥammad Fahd Khārūf, al-Muyassar fī al-qirāʾāt al-arbaʿ ʿashrah, p.582, expressly applies the pause rule to this word. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 1:430, 470; al-Bannā, Itḥāf, p.569; al-Qāḍī, al-Budūr, 1:335. Ibn al-Jazarī rejects pure yāʾ substitution here; it is distinct from softening with a faint kasrah. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 1:273–274; al-Bannā, Itḥāf, pp.164–165; al-Qāḍī, al-Budūr, 1:16. Al-Bannā also reports Ibn Muḥayṣin’s agreement in plural-mīm ṣilah, separately from the ten. Ibn al-Jazarī notes al-Hudhalī’s exceptional no-ṣilah report through al-Hāshimī from Ibn Jammāz. Ibn Mujāhid, al-Sabʿah fī al-qirāʾāt, pp.108–111, records earlier differences in Nāfiʿ’s transmission and identifies stillness as his own received practice. He explains that ṣilah retains the original plural wāw, whereas omission lightens pronunciation without obscuring plurality. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 1:304–305; Ibn Mujāhid, al-Sabʿah, pp.130–132; al-Bannā, Itḥāf, pp.49–50. Al-Bannā also reports Ibn Muḥayṣin’s agreement with Ibn Kathīr; that additional attribution lies outside the ten readings listed in the table. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 1:464–466. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 1:354–355. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 2:136; al-Bannā, Itḥāf, pp.139–140; Khārūf, al-Muyassar, p.565. Khārūf gives a general noun rule, applied here to the form mukhtalifūn. Ibn al-Jazarī records Ibn Sawwār’s broader examples, Ibn Mihrān’s restriction to avoid confusion with an object pronoun, and Ibn Miqsam’s exclusion of verbs. His conclusion identifies omission as the majority practice. ↩
-
Al-Akhfash, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 1:175–176. He permits the pause hāʾ or its omission with عَمَّ and comparable expressions, and gives dual and plural examples. This linguistic permission is distinct from the route-specific rules in Ibn al-Jazarī’s al-Nashr. ↩
-
Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:472, entry ما. He names Abū Wajzah and explains العاطفونت through العاطفونهْ. An unsigned note in Lisān records والمنعمون, “and those bestowing favours,” in the entry عطف instead of والمفضلون; the translation follows the latter wording quoted here. ↩
-
Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:472, entry ما. He names Abū al-Najm and quotes both parts of the rajaz. His explanation proceeds from mā to mah, then to the tāʾ form by analogy with pausing on feminine endings. The second part of the rajaz describes imminent death and enslavement. ↩
-
Ibn Jinnī, al-Muḥtasab, 2:347, 414; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:683; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar, 5:423; al-Samīn, al-Durr al-maṣūn, 10:647; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:201. The short headword in al-Muḥtasab omits the alif, but Ibn Jinnī’s explanation and the work’s index expressly identify retention. His linguistic judgment is “the weaker of the two usages”; the attribution of shādhdh status rests on its treatment in al-Muḥtasab, not that grammatical judgment. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar, 5:423; Abū Ḥayyān, al-Baḥr, 10:383; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ al-ghayb, 31:5; al-Ṭībī, Futūḥ al-ghayb, 16:241; al-Samīn, al-Durr, 10:647–648; Ibn ʿĀdil, al-Lubāb, 20:90–91; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. In the actual-stop construction, an understood verb governs the first question and the following words begin a new sentence. Makkī, Mushkil iʿrāb al-Qurʾān, 2:794, explains the pause hāʾ as preserving the fatḥah that indicates the deleted alif. Al-Zajjāj, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān wa-iʿrābuhu, 1:427–428, requires hāʾ and rejects a still mīm in his grammatical account; that does not determine recitational status. Māhir Ḥabbūsh quotes al-Azharī rejecting the stop even under necessity, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:35, in his note. Ibn Kamāl himself, 9:37, rejects treating hāʾ as proof of only one grammatical construction, because both constructions accommodate it. ↩
-
Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684; Ibn Kamāl, Tafsīr Ibn Kamāl, 9:36. The author’s yāʾ form and Māhir Ḥabbūsh’s discussion of a tāʾ form are distinct in Ibn Kamāl’s commentary, 9:36–37. ↩
-
Al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:203. Abū Ḥayyān, al-Baḥr, 10:383, has conflicting indications: the displayed form begins with yāʾ, while the explanation refers to the tāʾ of direct address and a second tāʾ. That passage cannot establish one unambiguous form without qualification. ↩
-
Ibn Jinnī, al-Muḥtasab, 2:347, with the note of ʿAlī al-Najdī Nāṣif, ʿAbd al-Ḥalīm al-Najjār and ʿAbd al-Fattāḥ Ismāʿīl Shalabī. The author’s verse ends in damān; the note records another opening and prefers ramād for the poem’s dāl rhyme. The complete witness, translation and variants appear in Iʿrāb §1 and Iʿrāb: Grammatical Analysis, note 6. ↩
-
Al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 2:292; al-Harawī, quoted by al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 4:403. Al-Farrāʾ says that al-Mufaḍḍal recited the poetry to him; he does not name its poet. His text reads القيل, “talk”; the note records القتل, “killing,” in another manuscript and regards that as a corruption. ↩
-
Ibn Mujāhid, al-Sabʿah, p.668; al-Nīsābūrī, Gharāʾib al-Qurʾān wa-raghāʾib al-furqān, 6:428. The qualification about Ibn Mujāhid’s book is his own, not an editor’s reconstruction. ↩
-
Al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:171; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204; al-Samīn, al-Durr, 10:649. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar, 5:423–424, describes the usual yāʾ wording and reports Ibn ʿĀmir’s tāʾ wording through an account involving Mālik b. Dīnār and al-Ḥasan, with variation. Al-Zajjāj, Maʿānī, 5:271, and al-Farrāʾ, Maʿānī al-Qurʾān, 3:227, name al-Ḥasan for verse4; al-Farrāʾ approves its Arabic. Al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ, 31:5, 8; al-Wāḥidī, al-Basīṭ, 23:114; al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; al-Samarqandī, Baḥr al-ʿulūm, 3:536; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Zād al-masīr, 4:388, also report Ibn ʿĀmir. These attributions do not all specify an identical route. ↩
-
Abū Ḥayyān, al-Baḥr, 10:383–384; al-Samīn, al-Durr, 10:649; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. Al-Ṭabarī, Jāmiʿ al-bayān, 24:8, reports al-Ḍaḥḥāk’s two-audience explanation with yāʾ displayed in both clauses and says that he read them thus. That wording is not the explicit tāʾ/yāʾ sequence reported by the three later authorities. ↩
-
Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar, 5:424. He relates the explanation of warning unbelievers and promising believers to the opposite sequence with a gap where the reader’s name would stand. It must not be assigned to al-Ḍaḥḥāk merely because a two-audience explanation is also reported from him. ↩
-
Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, 2:397–398, records no difference on these two verbs among the ten readings. Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar al-wajīz, 5:423, expressly gives yāʾ in both to the seven. Ibn Mujāhid, al-Sabʿah, p. 668, reports tāʾ from Ibn Dhakwān’s transmission of Ibn ʿĀmir, against Hishām’s yāʾ. That reported variant is not among the routes established by al-Nashr. ↩
-
Abū ʿAlī al-Fārisī, al-Ḥujjah, 6:367, quoted with adaptation by al-Wāḥidī, al-Basīṭ, 23:114; al-Bayḍāwī, Anwār al-tanzīl, 5:278; Ibn ʿAṭiyyah, al-Muḥarrar, 5:424; al-Rāzī, Mafātīḥ, 31:8; Abū al-Suʿūd, Irshād, 9:86; al-Ālūsī, Rūḥ al-maʿānī, 15:204. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, 4:684, also reports direct address without identifying the same transmission. ↩
-
Al-Suyūṭī, al-Itqān fī ʿulūm al-Qurʾān, 1:302–303, transmitting Makkī’s fourfold classification. See Q5, “Why do stopping rules differ between the two verses?”, and Q5. What does *kallā* reject or affirm?, note 16. ↩
-
Thaʿlab, heard by Ibn al-Anbārī and quoted in Ibn Manẓūr, Lisān al-ʿArab, 15:231; al-Qurṭubī, al-Jāmiʿ li-aḥkām al-Qurʾān, 19:170. See Q5, “Why do stopping rules differ between the two verses?”, and Q5. What does *kallā* reject or affirm?, note 16. ↩
